The Developer Connection…ice Driver Kit for OS/2 3/DEV3-D1.ISO/docs/glossary.inf

OS/2 Help File | 1994-02-27 | 426.0 KB | 18,371 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. A (abend - available choice) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o abend
o abnormal stop
o abnormal termination
o absolute path name
o absolute priority
o accelerator
o accented character
o access
o access control
o access control profile
o access mode
o accessory
o ACDI
o ACDI port
o ACDI redirection
o ACDI virtual serial port
o ACF
o ACF/NCP
o ACF/TCAM
o ACF/VTAM
o ACF/VTAME
o action
o action bar
o action point
o activate
o activate physical unit (ACTPU)
o active
o active list
o active program
o active window
o ACTPU
o adapter
o adapter address
o adapter number
o Adapter Support Interface
o adaptive pacing
o adaptive session-level pacing
o additional server
o address
o address extension
o address space
o Advanced Communications Function (ACF)
o Advanced Communications Function for the Network Control Program (ACF/NCP)
o Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method
  (ACF/TCAM)
o Advanced Communications Function for the Virtual Telecommunications Access
  Method (ACF/VTAM)
o Advanced Communications Functions for the Virtual Telecommunications Access
  Method Entry (ACF/VTAME)
o Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN)
o advanced program-to-program communications (APPC)
o Advanced Program-to-Program Communications/Personal Computers (APPC/PC)
o AEI
o AID
o alert
o alias
o allocate
o all points addressable (APA)
o all-rings broadcast frame
o all-stations broadcast frame
o alphanumeric
o alternate (Alt) mode
o alternate shift
o American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
o anchor point
o ANSI
o APA
o APAR
o APAR number
o API
o API trace
o APPC
o append
o appendage
o application
o Application Enabling Interface (AEI)
o application program
o application programming interface (API)
o application programming interface (API)  trace
o application request block
o application transaction program
o APPN
o APPN end node
o APPN intermediate routing
o APPN intermediate routing network
o APPN network
o APPN network node
o APPN node
o APVUFILE
o archive
o area
o ARF
o argument
o arithmetic expression
o arithmetic function
o arithmetic overflow
o ASCII
o ASCIIZ
o AS/400 PC Support
o aspect ratio
o assembler language
o assignment statement
o asynchronous
o asynchronous communications
o Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI)
o asynchronous transmission
o attach
o attaching device
o attach manager
o attach queue
o attention identifier (AID)
o attenuation
o attribute
o attribute byte
o audit trail
o authority
o authorization
o authorization ID
o authorized APPN end node
o authorized end node
o authorized program analysis report (APAR)
o auto-answer
o autocall
o autodial
o automatic response file (ARF)
o auto-removal
o auto-start
o auxiliary
o available choice


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. abend ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

abend

ABnormal END. A termination of operation because of a detected fault. Synonym
for abnormal termination.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. abnormal stop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

abnormal stop

In Communications Manager, stopping communications without waiting for current
functions to complete. Contrast with normal stop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.3. abnormal termination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

abnormal termination

 1. A system failure, a program failure, or an operator action that causes a
    program to end unsuccessfully. Contrast with normal termination.

 2. An unusual cessation of processing prior to termination.  Synonymous with
    abend.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.4. absolute path name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

absolute path name

Synonym for path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.5. absolute priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

absolute priority

A priority of a process that is not varied by the base operating system.
Contrast with dynamic priority.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.6. accelerator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

accelerator

A single keystroke that starts the processing of an application-defined
function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.7. accented character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

accented character

Synonym for special character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.8. access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

access

 1. The manner in which files or data are referred to by a computer.

 2. The controlled authorization to enter or to make use of objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.9. access control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

access control

The means by which network administrators restrict access to network resources,
user programs, and data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.10. access control profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

access control profile

A list of the access privileges assigned to users and groups for a particular
network resource in a domain. Two types of access profiles exist; see discrete
profile and generic profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.11. access mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

access mode

A method of operation used to obtain a specific logical record from, or to
place a specific logical record into, a file assigned to a mass storage device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.12. accessory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

accessory

A separately ordered IBM part that has no type number, is for purchase only,
and does not receive normal IBM maintenance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.13. ACDI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACDI

Asynchronous Communications Device Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.14. ACDI port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A serial port such as COM1, COM2, or COM3 that can be programmed for
asynchronous communications through ACDI.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.15. ACDI redirection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACDI redirection

 1. The feature that allows redirection of serial ports COM1, COM2, and COM3 on
    OS/2 workstations connected to a LAN. This feature enables OS/2
    workstations to connect to asynchronous resources through an asynchronous
    server over the LAN. The OS/2 workstation and the asynchronous server use
    the NETBIOS protocol to exchange information.

 2. The feature that allows serial ports that are accessed through ACDI to be
    redirected across an OS/2 supported local area network (LAN) to a Local
    Area Network Asynchronous Connection Server (LANACS).  This feature allows
    asynchronous resources that exist on a LANACS to be used by OS/2 LAN
    workstations.  An OS/2 LAN workstation and LANACS use the NETBIOS protocol
    to exchange information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.16. ACDI virtual serial port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACDI virtual serial port

A redirected ACDI port that appears to exist on the user's workstation but in
reality is a serial port that exists on a Local Area Network Asynchronous
Connection Server (LANACS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.17. ACF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACF

Advanced Communications Function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.18. ACF/NCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACF/NCP

Advanced Communications Function for the Network Control Program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.19. ACF/TCAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACF/TCAM

Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.20. ACF/VTAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACF/VTAM *

Advanced Communications Function for the Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.21. ACF/VTAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACF/VTAME

Advanced Communications Function for the Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method Entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.22. action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

action

One of a set of predefined tasks a computer can perform.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.23. action bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

action bar

Deprecated term for menu bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.24. action point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

action point

The current position on a screen where a pointer is pointing. See also hot
spot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.25. activate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

activate

 1. To make an object, program, system, or device available for use.

 2. To make a link for a communication session active.

 3. To make a window active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.26. activate physical unit (ACTPU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

activate physical unit (ACTPU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a command used to start a session on a
physical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.27. active ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

active

 1. Pertaining to anything that is current or operational.

 2. Referring to a file, page, or program that is in main storage or memory, as
    opposed to a file, page, or program that must be retrieved from auxiliary
    storage.

 3. Pertaining to a node or device that is connected or is available for
    connection to another node or device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.28. active list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

active list

A list where the cursor is focused. You place focus on an item in
Communications Manager by clicking on it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.29. active program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

active program

 1. A program currently running on the computer. Contrast with inactive
    program.

 2. Any program that is loaded and ready to be executed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.30. active window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

active window

The window that can receive input from the keyboard. It is distinguished by the
unique color of its title bar and window border.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.31. ACTPU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACTPU

Activate physical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.32. adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

adapter

A piece of hardware that connects a computer and an external device. See also
communication adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.33. adapter address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

adapter address

The address of the media access control (MAC) service access point (MSAP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.34. adapter number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

adapter number

A specific number that identifies an adapter when more than one adapter is used
in a workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.35. Adapter Support Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Adapter Support Interface

The DOS software used to operate IBM Token-Ring Network adapters in an IBM
personal computer and to provide a common interface to application programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.36. adaptive pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

adaptive pacing

See adaptive session-level pacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.37. adaptive session-level pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

adaptive session-level pacing

A form of session-level pacing in which session components exchange pacing
windows that may vary in size during the course of a session. This exchange
allows transmission within a network to adapt dynamically to variations in
availability of and demand for buffers on a session-by-session basis.
Session-level pacing occurs within independent stages along the session path
according to local congestion at the intermediate nodes. See also flow control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.38. additional server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

additional server

A server in a domain other than the domain controller. See server. See also
domain and domain controller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.39. address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

address

A value that identifies the location of a register, a particular part of
storage, or a network node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.40. address extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

address extension

In X.25 communications, the called and calling address extensions are optional
CCITT-specified facilities, available on networks that conform to the 1984
version of X.25. Synonymous with extended address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.41. address space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

address space

A set of addresses used to uniquely identify network accessible units,
sessions, adjacent link stations, and links in a node for each network the node
participates in.  A type 2.1 node has one address space for intranode routing
and one for each transmission group it can send message units on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.42. Advanced Communications Function (ACF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Communications Function (ACF)

The IBM licensed programs (principally ACF/TCAM, ACF/VTAM, ACF/VTAME, and
ACF/NCP) that use the concepts of Systems Network Architecture (SNA), including
distribution of function and resource sharing. ACF/TCAM and ACF/VTAM allow the
interconnection of two or more domains into one multiple-domain network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.43. Advanced Communications Function for the Network Control Program (ACF/NCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Communications Function for the Network Control Program (ACF/NCP)

 1. An IBM licensed program made up of a collection of utilities and small
    programs.

 2. An IBM licensed program that provides communication controller support for
    single-domain, multiple-domain, and interconnected network capability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.44. Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method
(ACF/TCAM)

An IBM licensed program that provides both single- and multiple-domain network
capability, as well as queued message handling.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.45. Advanced Communications Function for the Virtual Telecommunications Access Method ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Communications Function for the Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method (ACF/VTAM)

An IBM licensed program that controls communication and the flow of data in an
SNA network. ACF/VTAM provides single-domain multiple-domain, and
interconnected network capability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.46. Advanced Communications Functions for the Virtual Telecommunications Access Method Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Communications Functions for the Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method Entry (ACF/VTAME)

A licensed program that provides single-domain and multiple-domain network
capability for IBM 4300 systems that may include communication adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.47. Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN *)

 1. A set of protocols based on advanced program-to-program communications
    (APPC) that provides dynamic networking services for nodes supporting the
    protocols. See also end node and network node.

 2. An extension to SNA, featuring:

   o greater distributed network control that avoids critical hierarchical
     dependencies, thereby isolating the effects of single points of failure

   o dynamic exchange of network topology information to foster ease of
     connection and reconfiguration, adaptive route selection, and simplified
     network definition

   o automated resource registration and directory lookup.

    APPN extends the LU 6.2 peer orientation for end-user services to network
    control; APPN also uses LU 6.2 protocols on its own control point sessions
    that provide the network control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.48. Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC)

 1. An implementation of the Systems Network Architecture (SNA) logical unit
    (LU) 6.2 protocol that allows interconnected systems to communicate and
    share the processing of programs.  See also logical unit 6.2 (LU 6.2).

 2. The general facility characterizing the LU 6.2 architecture and its various
    implementations in products.

 3. Sometimes used to refer to the LU 6.2 architecture and its product
    implementations as a whole, or an LU 6.2 product feature in particular,
    such as an APPC application programming interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.49. Advanced Program-to-Program Communications/Personal Computers (APPC/PC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Program-to-Program Communications/Personal Computers (APPC/PC)

A DOS product that provides advanced program-to-program communications (APPC)
functions for a transaction program running on an IBM personal computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.50. AEI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AEI

Application Enabling Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.51. AID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AID

Attention identifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.52. alert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

alert

 1. In communications, an error message sent to the system services control
    point (SSCP) at the host system.

 2. In communications, an error message sent to a management services focal
    point in a network to identify a problem or an impending problem.

 3. In OS/2 LAN Server, an error or warning specified in the IBMLAN.INI file
    that is sent to the user.  See also system services control point (SSCP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.53. alias ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

alias

An alternative name used to identify an object or a logical unit. In
Communications Manager, the alternative names are local logical unit and
partner logical unit. These names are known only by the workstation, but they
point to real SNA names used to communicate with a partner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.54. allocate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

allocate

 1. To assign a resource to perform a specific task.

 2. In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a verb used to assign
    a session to a conversation for its use. Contrast with deallocate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.55. all points addressable (APA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

all points addressable (APA)

In computer graphics, pertaining to the ability to address and display or not
display each picture element (pel) on a display surface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.56. all-rings broadcast frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

all-rings broadcast frame

A frame that has the B-bit in the routing information field set to 1. In a
network of interconnected rings (or MAC segments of all kinds), bridges forward
all such frames to all rings (or MAC segments). The destination address is not
examined and plays no role in bridge routing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.57. all-stations broadcast frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

all-stations broadcast frame

A frame whose destination address is set to 1 throughout. All stations on any
ring the frame appears on will copy it. The routing information, not the
destination address, determines which ring the frame appears on. All-stations
broadcasting is independent of all-rings broadcasting; the two can occur
simultaneously or one at a time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.58. alphanumeric ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

alphanumeric

Pertaining to a character set that contains letters (A-Z), digits (0-9).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.59. alternate (Alt) mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

alternate (Alt) mode

A mode that is obtained by pressing and holding the Alt key. Pressing and
holding the Alt key places the keyboard in a special or alternate mode, such
that pressing a second key produces a predefined function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.60. alternate shift ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

alternate shift

During keyboard remap, an operation that defines a different set of characters
or functions for the keyboard when the Alt key is pressed. For example, the
Clear function is defined as the alternative shift state of the Backspace key.
The Clear function is performed by pressing and holding the Alt key while
pressing the Backspace key at the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.61. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

An organization consisting of producers, consumers, and general interest groups
that establishes the procedures by which accredited organizations create and
maintain voluntary industry standards in the United States.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.62. anchor point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

anchor point

A point in a window used by a program designer or by a window manager to
position a subsequently displayed window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.63. ANSI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ANSI

American National Standards Institute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.64. APA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APA

All points addressable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.65. APAR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APAR

Authorized program analysis report.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.66. APAR number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APAR number

A number assigned by IBM to identify an authorized program analysis report
(APAR). Contrast with Problem Management Record (PMR) number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.67. API ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

API

Application programming interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.68. API trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

API trace

Application programming interface trace.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.69. APPC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPC

Advanced program-to-program communications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.70. append ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

append

To attach a record or file to the end of another record or file. Contrast with
replace.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.71. appendage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

appendage

An application program routine provided to assist in handling a specific
occurrence of an event.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.72. application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

application

A program or set of programs that performs a task; for example, a payroll
application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.73. Application Enabling Interface (AEI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Application Enabling Interface (AEI)

An application programming interface (API) that supports the Systems
Application Architecture* (SAA*) programming requirements and is portable
across all computers supporting that API.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.74. application program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

application program

 1. A collection of software components that a user installs to perform
    particular types of work, or applications, on a computer.

 2. A program written for or by a user to perform work on a computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.75. application programming interface (API) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

application programming interface (API)

A formally defined programming language interface that is between an IBM system
control program or a licensed program and the user of a program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.76. application programming interface (API) trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

application programming interface (API) trace

A method used to trace points of the interface where user programs interact
with an API.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.77. application request block ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

application request block

A block of memory used as a data structure to pass API request information from
an application to the module that processes the request, which is typically a
dynamic library or a subsystem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.78. application transaction program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

application transaction program

A program written for or by a user to process the user's application; in a
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network, an end user of a type 6.2 logical
unit. Contrast with service transaction program (service TP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.79. APPN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN

Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.80. APPN end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN end node

A type 2.1 (T2.1) end node that provides full SNA end-user services and
supports sessions between its local control point (CP) and the CP in an
adjacent network node, dynamically registers its resources with the adjacent CP
(its network node server), sends and receives directory search requests, and
obtains management services.  The APPN end node can also attach to a subarea
network as a peripheral node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.81. APPN intermediate routing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN intermediate routing

The capability of an APPN network node to accept traffic from one adjacent node
and pass it on to another with awareness of session affinities in controlling
traffic flow and outage notifications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.82. APPN intermediate routing network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN intermediate routing network

The portion of an APPN network consisting of the network nodes and their
interconnections. Synonymous with type 2.1 (T2.1) intermediate routing network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.83. APPN network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN network

A type 2.1 (T2.1) network having at least one APPN node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.84. APPN network node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN network node

A type 2.1 (T2.1) node that, besides offering full SNA end-user services,
provides intermediate routing services within a T2.1 network and network
services to its local LUs and attached T2.1 end nodes in its domain.  An APPN
network node can also attach to a subarea network as a peripheral node. Synonym
for type 2.1 (T2.1) network node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.85. APPN node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPN node

An APPN network node or an APPN end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.86. APVUFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APVUFILE

The default name for the IBM host file transfer program (in the DBCS
environment) the host computer uses to communicate with Communications Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.87. archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

archive

A copy of one or more files or a copy of a database that is saved for future
reference or for recovery purposes in case the original data is damaged or
lost.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.88. area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

area

In computer graphics, a filled shape, such as a solid triangle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.89. ARF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ARF

Automatic response file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.90. argument ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

argument

A parameter passed between a calling program and a called program. See also
parameter and value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.91. arithmetic expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

arithmetic expression

An expression that contains arithmetic operations and operands that can be
reduced to a single numeric value. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.92. arithmetic function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

arithmetic function

A function that represents one of the basic arithmetic operations such as
addition, subtraction, division, or multiplication. It can also be a
mathematical operation such as finding the average, minimum, or maximum value
of a set of values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.93. arithmetic overflow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

arithmetic overflow

A condition in which the result of a mathematical operation exceeds the storage
or register capacity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.94. ASCII ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ASCII

American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.95. ASCIIZ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ASCIIZ

A format of ASCII characters where the string is ended with a byte containing
the value zero (0).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.96. AS/400 PC Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AS/400 PC Support

See IBM AS/400 PC Support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.97. aspect ratio ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

aspect ratio

The width-to-height ratio of an area, symbol, or shape; for example, the ratio
of the width of the data to its height as it is displayed on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.98. assembler language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

assembler language

A programming language whose instructions are usually in one-to-one
correspondence with machine instructions.  It may also provide other facilities
such as macro instructions. See also IBM Macro Assembler/2 (MASM).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.99. assignment statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

assignment statement

In a high-level language, a statement used to bind variables. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.100. asynchronous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

asynchronous

Pertaining to the lack of regular time relationship; unpredictable with respect
to the execution of program instructions. Contrast with synchronous.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.101. asynchronous communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

asynchronous communications

Data transmission in which transmission of a character or a block of characters
can begin at any time but the bits that represent the character or block have
equal time duration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.102. Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI)

An application programming interface (API) for asynchronous communications
provided by Communications Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.103. asynchronous transmission ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

asynchronous transmission

A type of data communication in which communication of a character or a block
of characters can begin at any time, but the bits that represent the character
or block have equal time duration. Contrast with synchronous transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.104. attach ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attach

 1. In programming, to create a task that can be executed asynchronously with
    the execution of the mainline code.

 2. To connect a device logically to a ring network so that it can communicate
    over the network.

 3. A request from a remote LU to start a conversation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.105. attaching device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attaching device

A device that is physically connected to a network and that can communicate
over the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.106. attach manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attach manager

The component of advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) that manages
incoming allocation requests.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.107. attach queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attach queue

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the queue of incoming
ALLOCATE requests that is managed by attach manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.108. attention identifier (AID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attention identifier (AID)

A character in an IBM 3270 or 5250 data stream indicating that the user has
pressed a key, such as the Enter key, that requests an action by the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.109. attenuation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attenuation

In data communications, a decrease in power from one point to another.  In
optical fibers, the optical power loss per unit of length is expressed in
decibels per kilometer (dB/km) at a specific wavelength.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.110. attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attribute

A characteristic or property; for example, the color of a line or the length of
a data field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.111. attribute byte ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attribute byte

In an IBM 3270 or application, the byte used for determining the
characteristics of the field that follows it; for example, a byte to indicate
that a field is colored, protected, or highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.112. audit trail ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

audit trail

A history of activity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.113. authority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

authority

A permission, privilege, or group of privileges granted to an individual or
group of individuals.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.114. authorization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

authorization

The right granted to a user or group of users to communicate with or make use
of a computer system, network, or database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.115. authorization ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

authorization ID

A sequence of characters that uniquely identifies a user or group of users.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.116. authorized APPN end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

authorized APPN end node

In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), an end node that is "trusted" by
its network node server to supply information about its resources that will
affect the network directory database. If a node is authorized, all information
it sends about itself is accepted. The authorization status of an end node is
system-defined in its network node server. Contrast with unauthorized APPN end
node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.117. authorized end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

authorized end node

See authorized APPN end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.118. authorized program analysis report (APAR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

authorized program analysis report (APAR)

A report of a problem caused by a suspected defect in a current unaltered
release of a program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.119. auto-answer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

auto-answer

A feature that enables a machine to respond without user action to a call it
receives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.120. autocall ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

autocall

A feature that enables a machine to automatically dial a number to establish a
switched connection without user action.  Contrast with autodial.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.121. autodial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

autodial

A feature that enables a machine to automatically dial a number to establish a
switched connection that requires user action. Contrast with autocall.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.122. automatic response file (ARF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

automatic response file (ARF)

A file used in linking programs that allows users to automatically process the
names of all the files desired.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.123. auto-removal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

auto-removal

In an IBM Token-Ring Network, the removal of a device from the data passing
activity without user intervention.  This action is accomplished by the
adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.124. auto-start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

auto-start

In Communications Manager, a facility that starts communications features or
emulator sessions without requiring the user to manually request the start.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.125. auxiliary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

auxiliary

Pertaining to a process or device not under direct control of the central host
processing unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.126. available choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

available choice

A choice that the current state of the application allows users to select.
Contrast with unavailable choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. B (backbone - byte reversal) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o backbone
o backbone ring
o backtab
o back up
o backup path
o backward
o baseband LAN
o base operating system
o BASIC
o basic conversation
o basic conversation verb
o basic information unit (BIU)
o Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)
o basic link unit (BLU)
o batch file
o BCC
o B-channel
o BCUG
o beacon
o beaconing
o beginner's all-purpose symbolic instruction code (BASIC)
o beginning of data
o beginning of field
o BF
o bid
o bidder session
o bilateral closed user group (BCUG)
o bimodal
o binary
o binary string
o binary synchronous communication (BSC)
o bind
o BIND pacing
o BIOS
o bis
o bit
o bit map
o bits per second (bps)
o BIU
o block
o block-check character (BCC)
o block mode
o BLU
o BN
o boot drive
o border
o boundary function (BF)
o boundary node (BN)
o bps
o bracket
o bracket protocol
o break signal
o bridge
o bridge number
o broadband LAN
o broadcast
o broadcast search
o BSC
o buffer
o buffer device
o buffer pool
o built-in function
o bus
o button
o bypass
o byte
o byte reversal


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. backbone ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

backbone

In local area network (LAN) communications, a transmission facility that
interconnects bridges in hierarchical networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. backbone ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

backbone ring

In an IBM Token-Ring Network, a ring that interconnects ring networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. backtab ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

backtab

A typing action that moves the cursor to the previous field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. back up ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

back up

To copy information onto a diskette or fixed disk for record keeping or
recovery purposes. See also restore.

Note:  The noun or adjective form of this term is one word-backup.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.5. backup path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

backup path

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), an alternate path for data flow that
uses the same definitions as the original path.  The backup path allows for
recovery of the operational portion of the network while problem determination
procedures are being performed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6. backward ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

backward

A scrolling action that displays information in the panel preceding the current
panel. Contrast with forward.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7. bandwidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bandwidth

The difference, expressed in hertz, between the highest and the lowest
frequencies of a range of frequencies.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8. baseband LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

baseband LAN

A LAN in which information is encoded, multiplexed, and transmitted using only
one channel. Contrast with broadband LAN.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.9. base operating system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

base operating system

A workstation program, such as OS/2, that manages system resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.10. BASIC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BASIC

Beginner's all-purpose symbolic instruction code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.11. basic conversation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

basic conversation

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a conversation between
two transaction programs using the APPC basic conversation API.  In typical
situations, service transaction programs use basic conversations and end-user
transaction programs use mapped conversations.  However, either type of program
may use either type of conversation. Contrast with mapped conversation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.12. basic conversation verb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

basic conversation verb

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a verb that a transaction
program issues when using the basic conversation application programming
interface (API). Contrast with mapped conversation verb.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.13. basic information unit (BIU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

basic information unit (BIU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the unit of data and control information
passed between half-sessions.  It consists of a request/response header (RH)
followed by a request/response unit (RU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.14. Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)

In an IBM personal computer, code that controls basic hardware operations such
as interactions with diskette drives, fixed-disk drives, and the keyboard. See
also Network basic input/output system (NetBIOS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.15. basic link unit (BLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

basic link unit (BLU)

The unit of data and control information transmitted over a link by data link
control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.16. batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

batch file

 1. A file containing DOS commands organized for sequential processing while in
    DOS mode.

 2. Files that are identified with a .BAT extension.  For OS/2 mode, see
    command file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.17. baud ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

baud

The unit of modulation rate of an analog signal transmitted between data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).  In data communications, each baud can
encode one or more binary bits of computer data.  Typically 1, 2, or 4 bits are
encoded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.18. BCC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BCC

Block-check character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.19. B-channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

B-channel

Bearer channel. A 64 kilobits per second channel for the transport of speech or
data from the customer to the local exchange.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.20. BCUG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BCUG

Bilateral closed user group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.21. beacon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

beacon

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a frame sent by an adapter indicating a serious
network problem, such as a broken cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.22. beaconing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

beaconing

To send beacon frames continuously.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.23. beginner's all-purpose symbolic instruction code (BASIC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

beginner's all-purpose symbolic instruction code (BASIC)

A high-level programming language with a small number of statements and a
simple syntax that is designed to be easily learned.  BASIC is widely used for
interactive applications on personal computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.24. beginning of data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

beginning of data

A cursor-movement function that moves the selection cursor to the leftmost
position on the topmost line of information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.25. beginning of field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

beginning of field

A typing action that moves the cursor to the first entry position in the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.26. BF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BF

Boundary function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.27. bid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bid

To inform another component of awaiting data or status and solicit a read or
similar operation to receive this information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.28. bidder session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bidder session

The half-session defined at session activation as having to request and receive
permission from the other half-session to begin a bracket.  See also contention
loser. Contrast with first-speaker session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.29. bilateral closed user group (BCUG) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bilateral closed user group (BCUG)

In data communications, two users who have bilaterally agreed to communicate
with each other, but not with other users. See also closed user group (CUG).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.30. bimodal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bimodal

Pertaining to both the DOS environment and the OS/2 environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.31. binary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

binary

Pertaining to the base two system of numbers.  The binary digits are 0 and 1.
See also bit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.32. binary string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

binary string

A sequence of consecutive binary digits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.33. binary synchronous communication (BSC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

binary synchronous communication (BSC)

A form of telecommunication line control that uses a standard set of
transmission control characters and control character sequences for binary
synchronous transmission of binary-coded data between stations. Contrast with
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.34. bind ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bind

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the response/request unit (RU)
    involved in activating a logical unit to logical unit (LU-LU) session.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the response/request unit (RU)
    involved in activating a session between logical units (LUs) or control
    points (CPs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.35. BIND pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BIND pacing

An SNA technique to define and control the flow of transmission. See also
pacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.36. BIOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BIOS

Basic Input/Output System.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.37. bis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bis

Bracket initiation stopped. An SNA command sent by a half-session to indicate
that it will not attempt to begin any more brackets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.38. bit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bit

A binary digit (either 0 or 1).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.39. bit map ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bit map

A representation in memory of a screen image.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.40. bits per second (bps) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bits per second (bps)

In serial transmission, the speed at which bits are transmitted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.41. BIU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BIU

Basic information unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.42. block ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

block

 1. A string of data elements recorded or transmitted as a unit.

 2. A string of records, a string of words, or a character string formed for
    technical or logical reasons to be treated as an entity.

 3. A set of things, such as words, characters, or digits handled as a unit.

 4. To wait, usually for an input/output (I/O) event to complete or for a
    resource to become available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.43. block-check character (BCC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

block-check character (BCC)

In longitudinal redundancy checking and cyclic redundancy checking, a character
that is transmitted by the sender after each message block and compared with
the receiver to determine if the transmission was successful.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.44. block mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

block mode

The transmission of data one block at a time. Contrast with character mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.45. BLU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BLU

Basic link unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.46. BN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BN

Boundary node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.47. boot drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

boot drive

Deprecated term for startup drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.48. border ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

border

A visual indication (for example, a separator line or a background color) of
the boundaries of a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.49. boundary function (BF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

boundary function (BF)

 1. A capability of a subarea node to provide protocol support for attached
    peripheral nodes, such as interconnecting subarea path control and
    peripheral path control elements, performing session sequence numbering for
    low-function peripheral nodes, and providing session-level pacing support.

 2. The component that provides these capabilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.50. boundary node (BN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

boundary node (BN)

A subarea node with boundary function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.51. bps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bps

Bits per second.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.52. bracket ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bracket

One or more chains of request units (RUs) and their responses that are
exchanged between two LU-LU half-sessions and that represent a transaction
between them.  One bracket must be completed before another one can be started.
Examples of brackets are database inquiries/replies, update transactions, and
remote job entry (RJE) output sequences to workstations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.53. bracket protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bracket protocol

A data flow control protocol in which exchanges between two session partners
are achieved through the use of brackets, with one partner designated at
session activation as the first speaker and the other as the bidder.  The
bracket protocol involves bracket initiation and termination rules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.54. break signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

break signal

 1. In communications, a signal that interrupts the sending end and takes
    control of the circuit at the receiving end.

 2. A signal generated when the transmit line is held low.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.55. bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bridge

A functional unit that connects two local area networks (LANs) that use the
same logical link control (LLC) but may use different media access control
(MAC) procedures.  For example, a bridge can be used to connect an IBM
Token-Ring Network and a PC Network. See also gateway.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.56. bridge number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bridge number

In a local area network, a number that distinguishes parallel bridges (that is,
bridges spanning the same two rings).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.57. broadband LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

broadband LAN

A LAN in which information is encoded, multiplexed, and transmitted with the
modulation of a carrier. A broadband LAN consists of more than one channel and
allows several signals to be transmitted across a cabling system, with each
signal modulating within a different frequency range.  The cable is divided
into multiple frequency ranges. Contrast with baseband LAN.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.58. broadcast ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

broadcast

A message sent to all computers on a network, rather than to specific users or
groups.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.59. broadcast search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

broadcast search

The propagation of a search request, when the location of a resource is unknown
to the requester, to all network nodes in an advanced peer-to-peer networking
(APPN) network.  Contrast with directed Locate search.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.60. BSC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BSC

Binary synchronous communication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.61. buffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

buffer

 1. An area of storage that is temporarily reserved for use in performing an
    input/output operation, which data is read into or written from.

 2. A routine or storage used to compensate for a difference in rate or flow of
    data, or time or occurrence of events, when transferring data from one
    device to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.62. buffer device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

buffer device

A device that has input/output (I/O) elements queued to a direct access device
before being written.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.63. buffer pool ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

buffer pool

A memory area reserved to satisfy the buffering requirements for a function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.64. built-in function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

built-in function

A function that is supplied by a programming language.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.65. bus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bus

A type of network topology where the network consists of a bidirectional
communication path with defined end points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.66. button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

button

A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, used to request or initiate
an action. See push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.67. bypass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bypass

To eliminate a component from a network by allowing the data to flow in a path
around it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.68. byte ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

byte

 1. A binary character operated upon as a unit and usually shorter than a
    computer word. Among personal computers, a byte consists of eight
    consecutive bits.

 2. The representation of a character.

 3. A group of eight adjacent binary digits representing one EBCDIC character.

 4. The amount of storage required to represent one character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.69. byte reversal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

byte reversal

A technique in which numeric data is stored with the least significant byte
first.  This technique is used for integers and addresses on machines with the
Intel** family of microprocessors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. C (cache - cylinder) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o cache
o call
o call-accepted packet
o call connected packet
o called address
o called address extension
o called party
o call establishment
o calling address
o calling address extension
o call request packet
o call supervision packet
o call user data (CUD)
o cancel
o Caps Lock
o capture to file
o carriage return (CR)
o carrier
o carrier detect
o carrier return
o cascaded menu
o cascading
o cascading choice
o case sensitive
o CBX
o CCITT
o cell
o CEN
o chain
o chained list
o change
o change direction protocol
o channel
o character
o character cell
o character code
o character constraint
o character data
o character display
o character frame
o character mode
o character set
o character string
o check box
o check mark
o checksum
o child process
o child window
o CICS
o CICS/VS
o ciphertext
o circuit
o circuit switching
o circular log
o class of service (COS)
o class of service database
o clear confirmation packet
o clear indication packet
o clear request packet
o clear to send (CTS)
o CLI
o click
o client
o client area
o client workstations
o clipboard
o clip limits
o clipping
o CLIST
o close
o closed path (or network)
o closed user group (CUG)
o cluster
o CMI
o CMS
o coaxial cable
o COBOL/2
o code
o code page
o code point
o column
o column separator
o COM
o ComitВ Consultatif International TВlВgraphique et TВlВphonique (CCITT)
o command
o command area
o command entry field
o command file
o command interface
o Command line interface (CLI)
o command list (CLIST)
o command name
o command processor
o command prompt
o command timeout
o command validation table
o comment
o Common Programming Interface (CPI)
o Common Services API
o common user access (CUA)
o common user identification (common user ID)
o communication
o communication adapter
o communication port
o communications and system management (C & SM)
o communications client
o communications co-processor
o communications line
o Communications Manager/2
o Communications Manager Kernel
o Communications Manager/2 system administrator
o communications server
o comparison operator
o compatibility mode
o compile
o completion code
o component
o composite end node (CEN)
o composite key
o computerized branch exchange (CBX)
o concatenated
o concatenation
o concurrency
o concurrent
o CONFIG.SYS
o configuration
o configuration file
o configure
o confirmation
o congestion
o congestion tolerance
o connecting blocks
o connection
o Connection Manager Interface (CMI)
o connection network
o connectivity
o connect phase
o console
o contact phase
o contention
o contention loser
o contention mode
o contention system
o contention winner
o context
o contextual help
o continuation messages
o continuous carrier
o control
o control block
o control character
o control code
o Control (Ctrl) mode
o controller
o Control Panel
o control point (CP)
o control program (CP)
o control station
o control vector
o conventional LU application (LUA)
o conversation
o conversational monitor system (CMS)
o conversational transaction
o conversation ID
o conversation security
o conversation security profile
o conversation state
o conversation type
o conversation verb
o conversion
o co-processor
o Copy
o corrective service
o Corrective Service diskette
o correlator
o COS
o country code
o CP
o CP capabilities
o CP-CP session
o CPI
o cpi
o CPI Communications
o CPI Communications side information
o CP name
o CP receive session
o CP send session
o CR
o CRC
o CRC error detection
o critical message
o critical section
o cryptography
o C Set/2 Language
o C & SM
o CTS
o CUA
o CUD
o CUG
o current connection
o current variable
o cursor
o cursor stability
o Customer Information Control System (CICS)
o Customer Information Control System for Virtual Storage (CICS/VS)
o customization
o Cut
o cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
o cylinder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. cache ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cache

 1. A high-speed storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions
    and data; it is used to reduce access time.

 2. An optional part of the directory database in network nodes where
    frequently used directory information may be stored to speed directory
    searches.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. call ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call

 1. To bring a computer program, routine, or subroutine into effect, usually by
    specifying the entry conditions and an entry point.

 2. A transmission for the purpose of identifying the transmitting station for
    which the signal is intended.

 3. An attempt to reach a user, whether or not the attempt is successful.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. call-accepted packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call-accepted packet

A call supervision packet that called data terminal equipment (DTE) transmits
to indicate to the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) that it accepts the
incoming call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. call connected packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call connected packet

A call supervision packet that data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
transmits to indicate to a calling data terminal equipment (DTE) that the
connection for the call has been completely established.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. called address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

called address

The network user address (NUA) of the called data terminal equipment (DTE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. called address extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

called address extension

Additional addressing information associated with the called address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. called party ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

called party

On a switched line, the location for establishing a connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. call establishment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call establishment

The complete sequence of events necessary to establish a data connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9. calling address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

calling address

The network user address (NUA) of the calling data terminal equipment (DTE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.10. calling address extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

calling address extension

Additional addressing information associated with the calling address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.11. call request packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call request packet

A call supervision packet that data terminal equipment (DTE) transmits to ask
that a connection for a call be established throughout the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.12. call supervision packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call supervision packet

A packet used to establish or clear a call at the interface between the data
terminal equipment (DTE) and the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.13. call user data (CUD) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

call user data (CUD)

User data that can be carried in X.25 call and call accept packets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14. cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cancel

 1. To end a task before it is completed.

 2. An action that removes the current window without processing it and returns
    to a previous one. See also Escape key and exit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.15. Caps Lock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Caps Lock

A typing action, resulting from pressing the Caps Lock key, that causes the
character keys to produce uppercase letters.  The keyboard remains in Caps Lock
mode until the user presses the Caps Lock key again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.16. capture to file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

capture to file

A feature of emulation that allows the user to save data received from a remote
location into a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.17. carriage return (CR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

carriage return (CR)

An operation that prepares for the next character or cursor to be printed or
displayed at the specified first position on the next line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.18. carrier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

carrier

On broadband networks, a continuous frequency signal that can be modulated with
an information-carrying signal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.19. carrier detect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

carrier detect

See data carrier detect (DCD).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.20. carrier return ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

carrier return

An indication to continue printing at the left margin of the next line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.21. cascaded menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cascaded menu

A menu that appears from, and contains choices related to, a cascading choice
in another menu. See also cascading choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.22. cascading ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cascading

The connecting of network controllers to each other in a succession of levels,
to concentrate many more lines than a single level permits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.23. cascading choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cascading choice

A choice on a menu that, when selected, presents another menu with additional
related choices. See also cascaded menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.24. case sensitive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

case sensitive

A condition in which entries for an entry field must conform to a specific
lowercase, uppercase, or mixed-case format to be valid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.25. CBX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CBX

Computerized branch exchange.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.26. CCITT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CCITT

Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique. See also the
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.27. cell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cell

Synonym for character cell.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.28. CEN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CEN

Composite end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.29. chain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

chain

 1. A group of logically linked user data records processed by LU 6.2.

 2. A group of request units delimited by begin-chain and end-chain. Responses
    are always single-unit chains.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.30. chained list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

chained list

A list in which the data elements may be dispersed but in which each data
element contains information for locating the next. (T) Synonymous with linked
list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.31. change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

change

In Communications Manager, an operation that allows the contents of a profile
to be altered.  In most cases, the keylock must be open before a change
operation can be performed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.32. change direction protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

change direction protocol

A data flow control protocol in which the sending logical unit (LU) stops
sending normal-flow requests, signals this fact to the receiving LU using the
change-direction indicator (in the request header of the last request of the
last chain), and prepares to receive requests.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.33. change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

number of sessions.

change number of sessions

An SNA function for negotiating session limits for a logical unit (LU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.34. channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

channel

See data communications channel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.35. character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character

A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the organization,
control, or representation of data. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.36. character cell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character cell

The rectangular space in which any single character is displayed on a screen or
printer device.  The position is addressed by row and column coordinators.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.37. character code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character code

The JISCII, ASCII, or EBCDIC values assigned to the symbols or function that
are used by a computer. Synonymous with code point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.38. character constraint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character constraint

A limitation placed by an information processing system on character formats.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.39. character data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character data

A type of data in the form of letters, digits, and special characters such as
punctuation marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.40. character display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character display

A display that uses a character generator to display predefined character boxes
of images (characters) on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.41. character frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character frame

In communications, the total set of information transmitted for a character
including the start, data, parity, and stop bits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.42. character mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character mode

In communications block mode, transmission of data one block at a time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.43. character set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character set

A group of characters used for a specific reason; for example, the set of
characters a printer can print or a keyboard can support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.44. character string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

character string

 1. A sequence of bytes or characters associated with a single-byte character
    set.

 2. A sequence of printable characters.

 3. A string of characters, such as a command and its parameters, used to
    communicate with the base operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.45. check box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

check box

A square box with associated text that represents a choice. When a user selects
the choice, the check box is filled to indicate that the choice is selected.
The user can clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Contrast with
radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.46. check mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

check mark

A symbol used on a graphics screen to indicate that users have selected an
item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.47. checksum ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

checksum

 1. The sum of a group of data associated with the group and used for checking
    purposes.

 2. On a diskette, the data written in a sector for error detection purposes; a
    calculated checksum that does not match the checksum of data written in the
    sector indicates a defective sector.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.48. child process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

child process

In the base operating system, a dependent process that is created by another
process. Contrast with parent process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.49. child window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

child window

A window that is positioned relative to another window (either a parent window
or another child window).  Child windows are dependent on their parent windows.
See sibling window. Contrast with parent window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.50. CICS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CICS*

 Customer Information Control System.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.51. CICS/VS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CICS/VS

Customer Information Control System for Virtual Storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.52. ciphertext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ciphertext

In computer security, text produced by encryption.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.53. circuit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

circuit

A medium for transmitting signals; for example, one or more conductors an
electric current can flow through.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.54. circuit switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

circuit switching

A process that, on demand, connects two or more data terminal equipment devices
(DTEs) through telephone switching equipment and permits the exclusive use of a
data circuit between them until the connection is released. (A) Synonymous with
line switching.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.55. circular log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

circular log

A file used to log data to a disk or diskette.  Each record is timestamped.
When the end of the file is reached, the file is not extended in size, but the
file is reused from the beginning.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.56. class of service (COS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

class of service (COS)

 1. A type of service needed for certain kinds of sessions.  For example, batch
    service or interactive service is needed in an Advanced Peer-to-Peer
    Networking (APPN) network.  Transmission service modes are associated with
    a particular class of service.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a designation of the path control
    network characteristics, such as path security, transmission priority, and
    bandwidth, that applies to a particular session. The end-user program
    specifies the COS when requesting a session by using a symbolic name
    (mode_name) that advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) maps
    into a list of virtual routes, any one of which can provide the requested
    level of service for the session.

 3. A designation of the transport network characteristics, such as route
    security, transmission priority, and bandwidth, needed for a particular
    session. The COS is derived from a mode name specified by the initiator of
    a session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.57. class of service database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

class of service database

A database maintained independently by each network node and optionally by
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) end nodes.  The database contains one
entry per class of service name; each database entry contains:

o A definition of the acceptable values for transmission group (TG) and node
  characteristics for routes described by that class of service name and the
  weight function to be used to compute the weights of nodes and TGs that meet
  the acceptable values.

o The transmission priority to be used for traffic that flows on routes
  described by that class of service name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.58. clear confirmation packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clear confirmation packet

See DCE clear confirmation packet and DTE clear confirmation packet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.59. clear indication packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clear indication packet

A call supervision packet that data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
transmits to inform data terminal equipment (DTE) that a call has been cleared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.60. clear request packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clear request packet

A call supervision packet transmitted by data terminal equipment (DTE) to ask
that a call be cleared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.61. clear to send (CTS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clear to send (CTS)

A signal that is raised by the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) when it
is ready to accept data, usually in response to request to send (RTS) being
raised.  Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI) will not transmit
data without this circuit being raised.  If this circuit is lowered and remains
lowered for more than 30 seconds, ACDI will assume the connection is lost and
will bring the connection down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.62. CLI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CLI

Command line interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.63. click ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

click

To press and release the select button on a pointing device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.64. client ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

client

A functional unit that receives shared services from a server. Contrast with
server. See communications client.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.65. client area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

client area

The part of the window inside the border that is below the menu bar. It is the
user's workspace, where a user types information and selects choices from
selection fields.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.66. client workstations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

client workstations

See communications client.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.67. clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clipboard

In Communications Manager, an area of storage provided by the base operating
system to hold data temporarily.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.68. clip limits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clip limits

The area of the paper that can be reached by a printer or plotter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.69. clipping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

clipping

In computer graphics, to truncate displayable data by removing those parts of a
displayed image that lie outside a given boundary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.70. CLIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CLIST

Command list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.71. close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

close

 1. To end an activity and remove it from the screen.

 2. To end the processing of a file or device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.72. closed path (or network) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

closed path (or network)

A network in which all the cable paths and wiring closets are directly or
indirectly connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.73. closed user group (CUG) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

closed user group (CUG)

In data communication, a group of users who can communicate with other users in
the group, but not with users outside the group.

Note:  Data terminal equipment (DTE) may belong to more than one closed user
group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.74. cluster ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cluster

 1. A station that consists of a control unit (a cluster controller) and the
    terminals attached to it.

 2. On an IBM personal computer, a particular measure of space on a disk or
    diskette for files allocated in cluster increments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.75. CMI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMI

Connection Manager Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.76. CMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMS

Conversational monitor system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.77. CNOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CNOS

Change number of sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.78. coaxial cable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

coaxial cable

A cable consisting of one inner conductor, usually a small copper tube or wire,
within and insulated from another conductor of larger diameter, usually copper
tubing or copper braid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.79. COBOL/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COBOL/2

See IBM COBOL/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.80. code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

code

 1. A set of instructions for the computer.

 2. To write instructions for the computer.

 3. A representation of a condition, such as an error code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.81. code page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

code page

 1. A table that defines a coded character set by assignment of a character
    meaning for a language or country to each code point in the table.

 2. A mapping between characters and their internal (binary) representation.
    See primary code page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.82. code point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

code point

A single character or shape defined in a code page and presented on a screen or
printer. Synonym for character code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.83. column ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

column

A vertical arrangement of data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.84. column separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

column separator

A symbol located on each side of a position of a field. The symbol does not
occupy a position on the display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.85. COM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COM

A representation of one of the asynchronous serial communications ports (COM1,
COM2, and COM3) supported by the OS/2 program.


═══ 3.86. ComitВ Consultatif International TВlВgraphique et TВlВphonique (CCITT) ═══

ComitВ Consultatif International TВlВgraphique et TВlВphonique (CCITT)

An international organization that recommends and publishes standards for the
interconnection of communications equipment. This organization is also known as
the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.87. command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command

 1. A control signal.  (A)

 2. Loosely, a mathematical or logic operator. (A)

 3. A request from a terminal for performance of an operation or execution of a
    program.

 4. Any field set in the transmission header (TH), request header (RH), and
    sometimes in portions of a request unit that initiates an action or that
    begins a protocol; for example:

   o Bind Session (session-control request unit), a command that activates an
     LU-LU session

   o The change-direction indicator in the RH of the last RU of a chain

 5. In SDLC, the control information (in the C-field of the link header) sent
    from the primary station to the secondary station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.88. command area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command area

An area on a display or window where a user types commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.89. command entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command entry field

A field a user types commands in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.90. command file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command file

 1. A file containing OS/2 commands organized for sequential processing while
    in OS/2 mode.  For DOS mode, see batch file.

 2. Files that have a .CMD file name extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.91. command interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command interface

The method used to type commands at the OS/2 or DOS command prompt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.92. Command line interface (CLI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command line interface (CLI)

A Procedures Language 2/REXX command file that provides the capability to enter
IBM Communications Manager commands from the operating system's command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.93. command list (CLIST) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command list (CLIST)

 1. In the host NetView* program, a sequential list of commands and control
    statements that is assigned a name; when the name is invoked (as a
    command), the commands in the list are executed.

 2. In Remote Operations Service, a list that is used in combination with the
    Exclusive Set option to control which commands can be processed by Remote
    Operations Service. See also command validation table and exclusive set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.94. command name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command name

The verb in a command that specifies the action to be performed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.95. command processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command processor

A program that performs an operation specified by a command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.96. command prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command prompt

A displayed symbol, such as C:/, that indicates a user can enter commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.97. command timeout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command timeout

An option of Remote Operations Service (ROPS) indicating the number of seconds
of processing time after which ROPS automatically ends a command, whether or
not it has completed processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.98. command validation table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

command validation table

A list of commands and an option indicating whether only the commands in the
list can be processed by Remote Operations Service (ROPS) or none of the
commands in the list can be processed by ROPS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.99. comment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

comment

Optional text that describes an object or statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.100. Common Programming Interface (CPI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Common Programming Interface (CPI)

The part of Systems Application Architecture * (SAA*) that specifies the
languages, commands, and calls that programmers must use when developing
applications.  These specifications provide consistent implementation on
participating systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.101. Common Services API ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Common Services API

Application programming interface (API) verbs used to access services provided
by Communications Manager for user-written programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.102. common user access (CUA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

common user access* (CUA*)

A part of Systems Application Architecture (SAA) that gives a series of
guidelines describing the way information should be displayed on a screen and
the interaction techniques between users and computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.103. common user identification (common user ID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

common user identification (common user ID)

The user identification of a PC Support user that is used for the ROUTER entry
in the CONFIG.PCS file or in the alternative configuration file if either file
does not have a user ID specified.  The common user ID of a PC Support user is
the same on each host system that the router is connecting to the personal
computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.104. communication ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communication

The transmission and reception of data. Synonymous with data communication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.105. communication adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communication adapter

A circuit card with associated software that enables a processor, controller,
or other device to be connected to a network. See also Realtime Interface
Co-processor (RIC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.106. communication port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communication port

 1. An access point for data entry or exit to or from a communication device
    such as a terminal.

 2. On a personal computer, a synchronous or asynchronous serial port to which
    a modem can be attached. Synonymous with port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.107. communications and system management (C & SM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communications and system management (C & SM)

 1. The process of coordinating operations over an entire communications
    system.

 2. In Communications Manager, the operation that supports the generating and
    sending of alerts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.108. communications client ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communications client

A workstation used for communication that receives shared communication
services from a communications server. See also communications server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.109. communications co-processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communications co-processor

A microprocessor on a communications adapter that supplements the operations of
the processor in the system unit, enabling a computer to use communication
services in parallel with other operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.110. communications line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communications line

The physical link (such as wire or a telephone circuit) that connects one or
more workstations to a communications control unit or that connects one control
unit to another. See also data link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.111. Communications Manager/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Communications Manager/2

A program that supports the development and use of OS/2 applications involving
two or more connected systems or workstations. Communications Manager provides
multiple concurrent connectivities using different protocols for IBM 3270 and
5250 emulation sessions, printer sessions, and file transfers. Communications
Manager supports a range of APIs, which may be called concurrently and are
designed for a variety of applications. Communications Manager includes the
requisite interfaces for network management.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.112. Communications Manager Kernel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Communications Manager Kernel

The program primarily responsible for starting and stopping communications
services and for tracking the various resources and services used by different
emulators and user transaction programs (TPs). It also tracks the status of
user sessions, and it allocates and initializes the system shared segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.113. Communications Manager/2 system administrator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Communications Manager/2 system administrator

See system administrator (SYSADM).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.114. communications server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

communications server

A server that provides shared communications services to workstations over a
network. In Communications Manager, server functions can be provided by a SNA
Gateway or APPN network node with a shared network adapter. See also
communications client.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.115. comparison operator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

comparison operator

A symbol, such as =, >, or <, used to specify a relationship between two
values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.116. compatibility mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

compatibility mode

A mode of operation for running IBM 3800 Model 1 application programs on the
3800 Model 3 with little or no change to the application or job control
language.  Contrast with page mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.117. compile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

compile

 1. To translate a program written in a high-level programming language into a
    machine language program.

 2. The computer actions required to transform a source file into an executable
    object file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.118. completion code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

completion code

The final return code provided by an adapter as a result of an issued command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.119. component ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

component

Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.120. composite end node (CEN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

composite end node (CEN)

A group of nodes that together support type 2.1 (T2.1) protocols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.121. composite key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

composite key

In Communications Manager, a character that combines with an accent to produce
an accented character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.122. computerized branch exchange (CBX) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

computerized branch exchange (CBX)

Exchange equipment that contains an integral computer. See also private branch
exchange (PBX).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.123. concatenated ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

concatenated

Linked; united in a series.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.124. concatenation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

concatenation

 1. The operation that joins two strings in the order specified, thus forming
    one string whose length is equal to the sum of the lengths of the two
    strings.

 2. The method of combining two strings into a single string by appending the
    second to the first.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.125. concurrency ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

concurrency

The shared use of resources by multiple interactive users or application
programs at the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.126. concurrent ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

concurrent

Pertaining to the occurrence of two or more activities within a given interval
of time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.127. CONFIG.SYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CONFIG.SYS

A file used by the base operating system that describes the devices, system
parameters, and resource options of a workstation. See also configuration file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.128. configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

configuration

 1. The task of defining the devices, features, parameters, and programs for a
    system. Synonymous with customization.

 2. In Communications Manager, the description of the devices, optional
    features, communications parameters, and programs installed on a
    workstation.

 3. The arrangement and relationship of the components in a system or network
    as defined by the nature, number, and chief characteristics of its
    functional units.  The term configuration may refer to a hardware
    configuration or a software configuration.

 4. The devices and programs that make up a system, subsystem, or network.

 5. The arrangement and relationship of the components in a system or network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.129. configuration file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

configuration file

 1. A file that specifies the characteristics of a system or subsystem.

 2. For the base operating system, the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the
    devices, system parameters, and resource options of a workstation. See also
    CONFIG.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.130. configure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

configure

 1. To prepare a workstation component or program for operation.

 2. To describe to a system the devices, optional features, and programs
    installed on the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.131. confirmation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

confirmation

 1. A prompt in a menu window that questions the user when the consequences of
    a user action are significant.

 2. Acknowledgment by a program that data has been received or a request
    completed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.132. congestion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

congestion

An overload condition caused by traffic in excess of the capabilities of a
network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.133. congestion tolerance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

congestion tolerance

In communications, the percentage of the total number of link stations on each
adapter which, when exceeded by the number of current link stations on each
adapter, causes any unused link stations to be freed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.134. connecting blocks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

connecting blocks

The fixtures used to end telephone wires in a wiring closet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.135. connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

connection

An association established between functional units for conveying information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.136. Connection Manager Interface (CMI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Connection Manager Interface (CMI)

An interface that allows user applications to communicate with connection
manager for the purpose of establishing connections (outgoing and incoming)
across a switched network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.137. connection network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

connection network

A representation within an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network of a
shared-access transport facility, such as a token ring, that reduces the
system-definition burden on each APPN end node attached to the facility. Each
such node may represent its generic connectivity to the other real nodes on the
facility by a single virtual routing node, which each node reports to its
network node server in the APPN network. The report includes local signaling
information needed by any partner wanting to contact this node over the
facility. Synonymous with link connection network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.138. connectivity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

connectivity

The physical link that provides the ability to attach to another system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.139. connect phase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

connect phase

An optional phase of link activation during which initial communication is
established.  It includes "dialing" and "answering" on switched links and may
include modem equalization. The connect phase is followed either by the
optional prenegotiation phase or by the contact phase. See contact phase and
prenegotiation phase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.140. console ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

console

A part of a computer used for communication between the operator or maintenance
engineer and the computer. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.141. contact phase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contact phase

A phase of link activation during which negotiation-proceeding XID3s are
exchanged between the connected link stations to establish the primary and
secondary roles of the link stations, the transmission group number to be used,
and other characteristics of the link. During this phase, the mode-setting
command is sent and acknowledged after the primary and secondary roles are
established. See connect phase and prenegotiation phase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.142. contention ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contention

 1. In a session, a situation in which two or more network accessible units
    (NAUs) attempt to initiate the same action at the same time, such as when
    both attempt to send data in a half-duplex protocol (half-duplex
    contention) or when both attempt to start a bracket (bracket contention).
    At session initiation, one NAU is defined to be the contention winner; its
    action will take precedence when contention occurs.  The contention loser
    must get explicit or implicit permission from the contention winner to
    begin its action.

 2. In a local area network (LAN), a situation in which two or more data
    stations are allowed by the protocol to start transmitting concurrently and
    thus risk collision.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.143. contention loser ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contention loser

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the logical unit (LU)
that must request and receive permission from the session partner LU to
allocate a session.  Contrast with contention winner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.144. contention mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contention mode

In data communication, a mode of transmission in which any station may transmit
whenever the line is available.  If stations transmit simultaneously, protocols
determine which station wins the contention.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.145. contention system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contention system

A system in which one or more stations compete for use of a communications
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.146. contention winner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contention winner

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the logical unit (LU)
that can allocate a session without requesting permission from the session
partner LU.  Contrast with contention loser. Synonymous with first-speaker
session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.147. context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

context

The environment a program processes functions in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.148. contextual help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

contextual help

Information about a field or other display element on which the cursor is
positioned that is provided to the user upon request. See also general help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.149. continuation messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

continuation messages

Messages used in host menu and panel definitions to allow the user to continue
the definition process regardless of an error being detected in the definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.150. continuous carrier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

continuous carrier

On broadband networks, a condition in which a carrier signal is being
constantly broadcast on a given frequency.  No further information can be
broadcast on that frequency.  Synonymous with hot carrier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.151. control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control

In Communications Manager, a component of the user interface that allows a user
to select choices or type information, for example, a check box, an entry
field, or a radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.152. control block ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control block

 1. A storage area used by a computer program to hold control information.

 2. A specifically formatted block of information provided from the application
    program to an application programming interface (API) to request an
    operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.153. control character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control character A character whose occurrence in a particular context
specifies a control function.  (T)

See also transmission control characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.154. control code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control code

A command embedded in the input data stream to control the printed output.
Examples of control codes are new line feed and tabs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.155. Control (Ctrl) mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Control (Ctrl) mode

A mode that is obtained by pressing and holding the Ctrl key. Pressing and
holding the Ctrl key places the keyboard in a special control mode, such that
pressing a second key produces a predefined function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.156. controller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

controller

A unit that controls operations for one or more devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.157. Control Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Control Panel

A function of the OS/2 program that is used to set up user preferences, such as
color on a screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.158. control point (CP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control point (CP)

 1. A network component that manages a set of resources.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA) subarea networks, a system services
    control point (SSCP) provides hierarchical control of a group of nodes.

 3. In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), a control point manages the
    adapters and links of a node and can exchange topology and directory
    information with other control points.

 4. A component of a node that manages the resources of that node and
    optionally provides services to other nodes in the network.  Examples are a
    system services control point (SSCP) in a type 5 node, a physical unit
    control point (PUCP) in a type 4 node, a network-node control point (NNCP)
    in a type 2.1 (T2.1) network node, and an end node control point (ENCP) in
    a T2.1 end node. An SSCP and an NNCP can provide services to other nodes.

 5. A component of a T2.1 node that manages the resources of that node. If the
    T2.1 node is an APPN node, the CP is capable of engaging in CP-CP sessions
    with other APPN nodes. If the T2.1 node is a network node, the CP also
    provides services to adjacent end nodes in the T2.1 network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.159. control program (CP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control program (CP)

A computer program designed to schedule and to supervise the execution of
programs of a computer system. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.160. control station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control station

The controlling or primary computer on a multipoint line.  The control station
controls the sending and receiving of data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.161. control vector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

control vector

One of a general class of RU substructures that has variable length, is carried
within some enclosing structure, and has a 1-byte key used as an identifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.162. conventional LU application (LUA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conventional LU application (LUA)

An implementation of the SNA LU 0 protocol that allows a workstation to
communicate with host applications using LU 0, 1, 2, or 3 protocols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.163. conversation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation

 1. A logical connection between two transaction programs using an LU 6.2
    session.  Conversations are delimited by brackets to gain exclusive use of
    a session.

 2. In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a connection between
    two transaction programs over a logical unit to logical unit (LU-LU)
    session that allows them to communicate with each other while processing a
    transaction.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.164. conversational monitor system (CMS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversational monitor system (CMS)

A virtual machine operating system that provides general interactive time
sharing, problem solving, and program development capabilities.  It operates
only under control of the VM/370 control program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.165. conversational transaction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversational transaction

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), two or more programs
communicating using the services of logical units (LUs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.166. conversation ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation ID

 1. A unique ID for each conversation between two transaction programs.

 2. A unique ID for each conversation between two APPC transaction programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.167. conversation security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation security

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a process that allows
validation of a user ID or group ID and password before establishing a
connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.168. conversation security profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation security profile

The set of user IDs or group IDs and passwords that are used by advanced
program-to-program communications (APPC) for conversation security.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.169. conversation state ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation state

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a state that determines
which verbs APPC allows a program to issue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.170. conversation type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation type

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a type of conversation,
either basic or mapped.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.171. conversation verb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversation verb

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), one of the verbs a
transaction program issues to perform transactions with a remote program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.172. conversion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

conversion

 1. In programming languages, the transformation between values that represent
    the same data item but belong to different data types. (I)

 2. The process of changing from one method of data processing to another or
    from one data processing system to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.173. co-processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

co-processor

A microprocessor that extends the address range of the processor in the system
unit or adds specialized instructions to handle a particular category of
operations; for example, an input/output (I/O) co-processor, a math processor,
or a networking processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.174. Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy

A Presentation Manager* choice that places a copy of a selected object onto the
clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.175. corrective service ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

corrective service

See Corrective Service diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.176. Corrective Service diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Corrective Service diskette

A diskette provided by IBM to service coordinators for resolving
user-identified problems. This diskette includes program updates designed to
resolve problems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.177. correlator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

correlator

 1. A variable used to associate the reply message with the received message.

 2. A transaction identifier used by NetView* to associate the reply message
    with the received message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.178. COS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COS

Class of service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.179. country code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

country code

 1. A three-digit number specifying a country and that country's preferred
    formats for date and time values, currency, and numeric data.

 2. In Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI), a number specifying
    a country that is used to enforce specific country requirements for
    connecting to telephone networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.180. CP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CP

 1. Control program.

 2. Control point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.181. CP capabilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CP capabilities

The level of network services provided by the control point (CP) in an Advanced
Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) end node or network node.  CP capabilities
information is exchanged during the activation of CP-CP sessions between two
nodes.  A node's CP capabilities are encoded in the CP capabilities (X'12C1')
general data stream variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.182. CP-CP session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CP-CP session

The parallel sessions between two control points (CPs), using LU 6.2 protocols
and a mode name of CPSVCMG, on which network services requests and replies are
exchanged.  Each CP of a given pair has one contention-winner session and one
contention-loser session with the other.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.183. CPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CPI

Common Programming Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.184. cpi ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cpi

Characters per inch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.185. CPI Communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CPI Communications

An application programming interface (API) provided with Advanced Peer-to-Peer
Networking (APPN) that frees users from using the older non-SAA interface and
allows them to write system-independent CPI Communications applications. CPI
Communications programming interfaces are written in C language and support the
following languages:

o C
o COBOL (16 bit)
o FORTRAN (16 bit)
o REXX


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.186. CPI Communications side information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CPI Communications side information

Advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) configuration definitions
used by a CPI Communications application program. These definitions are used to
initiate communication with a particular partner. For example, a symbolic
destination name is used to identify each particular side entry, and the side
entry defines which mode, security level, partner LU, and partner transaction
program (TP) should be used together. APPC must be configured in conjunction
with CPI Communications side information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.187. CP name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CP name

A network-qualified name of a control point (CP) consisting of a network ID
qualifier identifying the network (or name space) the CP's node belongs to and
a unique name within the scope of that network ID identifying the CP.  Each
T2.1 node has one CP name assigned to it during system definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.188. CP receive session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CP receive session

The contention-loser CP-CP session.  On this session, directory services in a
control point (CP) receives a Locate search or registration request from a
partner CP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.189. CP send session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CP send session

The contention-winner CP-CP session.  On this session, directory services in a
control point (CP) sends a Locate search or registration request to a partner
CP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.190. CR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CR

Carriage return.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.191. CRC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CRC

Cyclic redundancy check.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.192. CRC error detection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CRC error detection

A system of error checking performed at both the sending and receiving station
after a frame check sequence or block check character has been accumulated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.193. critical message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

critical message

The information provided by the program to the user that describes a required
action the user must take.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.194. critical section ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

critical section

A part of a program that must run without interruption.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.195. cryptography ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cryptography

The transformation of data to conceal its meaning.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.196. C Set/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

C Set/2

See IBM C Set/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.197. C & SM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

C & SM

Communications and system management.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.198. CTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CTS

Clear to send.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.199. CUA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CUA

Common user access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.200. CUD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CUD

Call user data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.201. CUG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CUG

Closed user group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.202. current connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

current connection

The connection a user has during a terminal session or batch job.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.203. current variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

current variable

The most recent setting of the variable used.  See local variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.204. cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cursor

A symbol displayed on the screen, associated with an input device, and used to
indicate where input from the device will be placed. Synonymous with text
cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.205. cursor stability ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cursor stability

An isolation level that provides more concurrency than repeatable read.  With
cursor stability, a unit of work holds locks only on its uncommitted changes
and the current row of each of its cursors. See also isolation level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.206. Customer Information Control System (CICS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Customer Information Control System (CICS)

An IBM-licensed program that enables transactions entered at remote terminals
to be processed concurrently by user-written application programs.  It includes
facilities for building, using, and maintaining databases.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.207. Customer Information Control System for Virtual Storage (CICS/VS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Customer Information Control System for Virtual Storage (CICS/VS)

An IBM-licensed program used in a communications network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.208. customization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

customization

Synonym for configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.209. Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cut

A Presentation Manager function that moves a marked section of text to the
clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.210. cyclic redundancy check (CRC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

A numeric value, derived from the bits in a message, that is used to check for
any bit errors in transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.211. cylinder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

cylinder

 1. The fixed disk or diskette tracks that can be read or written without
    moving the disk drive or diskette drive read and write mechanism.

 2. The number of tracks for space allocation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. D (DAF - dynamic priority definition) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o DAF
o data
o data area
o database
o data carrier detect (DCD)
o data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
o data communication
o data communications channel
o data file
o data flow control (DFC)
o data frame
o datagram
o data independence
o data interchange format (DIF)
o data link
o data link control (DLC)
o data link layer
o data mode
o data network identification code (DNIC)
o data packet
o data segment
o data services command processor (DSCP)
o data services request block (DSRB)
o data set
o data set ready (DSR)
o data station
o data stream
o data structure
o data terminal equipment (DTE)
o data terminal ready (DTR)
o data trace
o data transmission facility
o data type
o DBCS
o D-bit
o dBm
o DCD
o DCDB
o DCE
o DCE clear confirmation packet
o D-channel
o DDSA
o deactivate
o dead key
o deadlock
o deallocate
o decibels above milliwatt (dBm)
o dedicate
o dedicated server
o default
o default choice
o default printer
o default value
o degate
o DEL
o delay characteristics
o delete
o delimiter
o delivery confirmation bit (D-bit)
o demodulate
o dependent LU
o deselect
o Desktop folder
o desktop window
o destination
o destination address
o destination address field (DAF)
o destination logical unit (DLU)
o destination service access point (DSAP)
o DevHlp
o device
o device driver
o device name
o device pool
o device queue
o DFC
o DFC layer
o DFT
o diagnostic diskette
o diagnostic packet
o diagnostic tool
o dial utilities
o DIF
o digital data service adapter (DDSA)
o Digital Intel Xerox (DIX)
o DIP switch
o direct authorization
o direct connect
o directed Locate search
o directly-attached device
o device context
o direct manipulation
o directory
o directory table
o directory services (DS)
o disable
o disabled
o DISC
o discrete profile
o disk
o diskette
o disk operating system (DOS)
o display
o display device
o display point
o display screen
o display station pass-through (DSPT)
o distributed directory database
o distributed feature
o Distributed Function Mode
o distributed function terminal (DFT)
o distributed network directory
o distributed transaction processing services
o distribute workstation
o distribution panel
o distribution tape reel (DTR)
o DIX
o DLC
o DLL
o DLR
o DLU
o DNIC
o domain
o domain control database (DCDB)
o domain controller
o domain definition
o domain search
o DOS
o DOS mode
o dot matrix
o double-byte character session
o double-byte character set (DBCS)
o double-click
o doubleword address
o download
o downstream
o dragging
o drive
o drop
o DS
o DSAP
o DSCP
o DSPT
o DSQCOMM
o DSR
o DSRB
o DTE
o DTE clear confirmation packet
o DTR
o dual in-line package (DIP) switch
o dumb modem
o dump
o dump diskette
o dump services
o duplex
o dynamic link library (DLL)
o dynamic link routine
o dynamic linking
o dynamic priority
o dynamic priority variation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. DAF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DAF

Destination address field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data

The coded representation of information for use in a computer. Data has certain
attributes such as type and length.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. data area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data area

A memory area used by a program to hold information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

database

A systematized collection of data that can be accessed and operated upon by an
information processing system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Database Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Database Manager

A component of the Extended Services program or DB2/2*. Database Manager is
based on the relational model of data and allows users to create, update, and
access databases.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. data carrier detect (DCD) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data carrier detect (DCD)

This signal is raised by the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) when it
and the remote DCE have recognized each other's carrier signal and have
synchronized themselves.  If this circuit is lowered and remains lowered for
more than 30 seconds, Asynchronous Communication Device Interface (ACDI) will
assume the connection is lost and will bring the connection down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)

 1. The equipment installed at the user's premises that provides all the
    functions required to establish, maintain, and end a telephone connection
    for data transmission, and which does the signal conversion and coding
    between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. See also modem.

 2. For an X.25 packet switching network, the equipment in a data station that
    provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal
    equipment (DTE) and the line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. data communication ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data communication

Synonym for communication.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. data communications channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data communications channel

A means of one-way data transmission.  Contrast with logical channel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. data file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data file

A collection of user data that is not a program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. data flow control (DFC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data flow control (DFC)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a request/response unit (RU) category
used for requests and responses exchanged between the DFC layer in one
half-session and the DFC layer in the session partner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. data frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data frame

Synonym for frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.13. datagram ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

datagram

 1. In NETBIOS, a particular type of information encapsulation at the network
    layer of the adapter protocol.  When a message is sent as a datagram, the
    receiver of the message sends no acknowledgment for its receipt.

 2. In packet switching, a self-contained packet, independent of other packets,
    that carries information sufficient for routing from the originating data
    terminal equipment (DTE) to the destination DTE without relying on earlier
    exchanges between the DTEs and the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.14. data independence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data independence

The property of a database management system that enables data to be processed
independently of access mode, storage method, or arrangement of data.  Data
independence reduces the need to modify application programs when data storage
and access methods are modified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.15. data interchange format (DIF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data interchange format (DIF)

A format that presents data in rows and columns.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.16. data link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data link

A physical link, such as a wire or a telephone circuit, that connects one or
more devices or communication controllers. See also communications line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.17. data link control (DLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data link control (DLC)

 1. The physical means of connecting one location to another for the purpose of
    transmitting and receiving data.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the protocol layer that consists of
    the link stations that schedule data transfer over a link between two nodes
    and perform error control for the link.

 3. In Communications Manager, a profile containing parameters for a
    communication adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.18. data link layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data link layer

In Open Systems Interconnection architecture, the layer that provides the
functions and procedures used to provide error-free, sequential transmission of
data units over a data link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.19. data mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data mode

In data communications, a time during which phone lines are sending or
receiving characters on the communications line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.20. data network identification code (DNIC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data network identification code (DNIC)

The first four digits (digits 0 to 3) of a network user address (NUA) that
identify the country and the service within the country.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.21. data packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data packet

At the interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE), a packet used to transmit user data over a
virtual circuit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.22. data segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data segment

A control section of a program which contains only data.  It is usually
addressed with its own hardware segment and offset.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.23. data services command processor (DSCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data services command processor (DSCP)

A Network Communications Control Facility component that structures a request
for recording and retrieving data in the application program database and
structures the request to solicit data from a device in the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.24. data services request block (DSRB) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data services request block (DSRB)

The control block in the NetView program that contains information that a data
services command processor (DSCP) needs to communicate with the data services
task (DST).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.25. data set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data set

The major unit of data storage and retrieval, consisting of a collection of
data in one of several prescribed arrangements and described by control
information the system has access to. See also file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.26. data set ready (DSR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data set ready (DSR)

This signal is raised by the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) to
indicate it is online and ready to begin communicating. Some DCEs use this
signal as a power-on indicator. Asynchronous Communications Device Interface
(ACDI) expects this signal to be lowered after every connection take-down for a
minimum of 100 ms. Failure to do so may cause a warning message to be displayed
instructing the user to ensure the DCE has, in fact, gone on-hook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.27. data station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data station

Synonym for station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.28. data stream ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data stream

 1. The data and control information that is transmitted over a communication
    facility during a single operation. All data transmitted through a data
    channel in a single read or write operation.

 2. A continuous stream of data elements being transmitted or intended for
    transmission in character or binary-digit form using a defined format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.29. data structure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data structure

The syntactic structure of symbolic expressions and their storage allocation
characteristics.  (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.30. data terminal equipment (DTE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data terminal equipment (DTE)

The equipment that sends or receives data, or both.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.31. data terminal ready (DTR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data terminal ready (DTR)

The ON condition of the circuit connected to the RS232C modem indicating that
the terminal is ready to send or receive data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.32. data trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data trace

A record of the data sent and received on a communications link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.33. data transmission facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data transmission facility

See telecommunication facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.34. data type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

data type

An attribute used for defining data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.35. DBCS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DBCS

Double-byte character set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.36. D-bit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

D-bit

Delivery confirmation bit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.37. dBm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dBm

Decibels above milliwatt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.38. DCD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DCD

Data carrier detect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.39. DCDB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DCDB

Domain control database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.40. DCE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DCE

Data circuit-terminating equipment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.41. DCE clear confirmation packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DCE clear confirmation packet

A call supervision packet that data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
transmits to confirm that a call has been cleared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.42. D-channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

D-channel

A signaling channel in integrated services digital network (ISDN). A 16
kilobits-per-second channel for transport of signaling information or packet
data from the customer to the local exchange or premises switch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.43. DDSA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DDSA

Digital data service adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.44. deactivate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

deactivate

To take any element out of service, rendering it inoperable or placing it in a
state in which it cannot perform the functions it was designed for.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.45. dead key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dead key

Synonym for nonescaping key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.46. deadlock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

deadlock

 1. An unresolved contention for the use of a resource.

 2. In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a situation that
    occurs when two or more nodes are waiting for messages from each other and
    cannot continue processing verbs. See also suspend.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.47. deallocate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

deallocate

To release a resource that is assigned to a specific task.  Contrast with
allocate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.48. decibels above milliwatt (dBm) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

decibels above milliwatt (dBm)

A unit of absolute power measurement that is scaled such that 0 dBm equals 1
milliwatt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.49. dedicate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dedicate

To assign a system resource, such as an input/output (I/O) device, a program,
or a whole system, to one application or purpose.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.50. dedicated server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dedicated server

A personal computer on a network that functions only as a server, not as a
requester and a server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.51. default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

default

Pertaining to a value, attribute, or option that is assumed when none is
explicitly specified. See default value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.52. default choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

default choice

An emphasized and preselected choice provided by a program when a window is
initially displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.53. default printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

default printer

A printer that is assigned to a system or user and accepts all the printed
output from that system or user, when no other printer is specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.54. default value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

default value

A predetermined value, attribute, or option that is assumed when no other is
explicitly specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.55. degate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

degate

A feature of a co-processor adapter that does not allow read and write access
to the adapter memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.56. DEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEL

A format used to export and import data formatted with delimited PC code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.57. delay characteristics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

delay characteristics

The average amount of time required for operations (call setup, call clearing,
data transfer, and so forth) to be performed on a packet-switching network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.58. delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

delete

To remove something; for example, to delete a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.59. delimiter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

delimiter

 1. A character or flag that groups or separates items of data.

 2. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a bit pattern that defines the limits of a
    frame or token on a ring network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.60. delivery confirmation bit (D-bit) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

delivery confirmation bit (D-bit)

A bit in the data-packet header that instructs the network to wait until
delivery to the remote data terminal equipment (DTE) has been confirmed before
confirming delivery to the sending DTE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.61. demodulate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

demodulate

To extract or filter a signal from a modulated carrier and return the frequency
of the signal to its original level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.62. dependent LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dependent LU

An LU controlled by a Systems Network Architecture (SNA) host system. A
dependent LU cannot send BIND commands. See SSCP-dependent LU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.63. deselect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

deselect

An action that causes a choice that was previously selected to no longer be
selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.64. Desktop folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Desktop folder

A Presentation Manager folder that fills the entire screen and contains all
other folders and objects. Synonymous with main window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.65. desktop window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

desktop window

The window, corresponding to the physical device, from which all other types of
windows are established.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.66. destination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

destination

A point or location in a network to which data is sent, for example, a node, a
station, or a terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.67. destination address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

destination address

A code that identifies the location where information is sent. For a LAN, this
is a 12 hex-digit address of your partner system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.68. destination address field (DAF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

destination address field (DAF)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a field in a FID2 transmission header
that contains the network address of the destination. Contrast with origin
address field (OAF).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.69. destination logical unit (DLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

destination logical unit (DLU)

The logical unit to which data is to be sent. Contrast with origin logical unit
(OLU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.70. destination service access point (DSAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

destination service access point (DSAP)

 1. The address of the link service access point (LSAP) for which a link
    protocol data unit (LPDU) is destined.

 2. A field in the LPDU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.71. DevHlp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DevHlp

An OS/2 program function used by device drivers to request operating system
services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.72. device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

device

 1. An input/output (I/O) unit such as a terminal, display, or printer.

 2. In OS/2 LAN Server, a drive (for files resources) or port (for printers and
    serial devices) that is assigned when a resource is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.73. device context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

device context

A logical description of a data destination that is a device other than the
screen (for example, a printer or plotter).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.74. device driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

device driver

The executable code needed to attach and use a device such as a display,
printer, plotter, or communications adapter. See also virtual device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.75. device name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

device name

A name reserved by the system or a device driver that refers to a specific
device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.76. device pool ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

device pool

A group of serial devices available to local area network (LAN) users.  Often,
several users want to use a device at the same time. The network administrator
creates a pool of devices so that when one is in use, users are connected to a
similar device in the pool.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.77. device queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

device queue

An ordered list of device requests routed to a serial device or device pool one
at a time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.78. DFC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DFC

Data flow control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.79. DFC layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DFC layer

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the layer within a half-session that
controls whether the half-session can send, receive, or concurrently send and
receive request units (RUs). This DFC layer also groups related RUs into RU
chains, delimits transactions by way of the bracket protocol, controls the
interlocking of requests and responses in accordance with control modes
specified at session activation, generates sequence numbers, and correlates
requests and responses.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.80. DFT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DFT

Distributed function terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.81. diagnostic diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

diagnostic diskette

A diskette used by computer users and service personnel to diagnose hardware
problems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.82. diagnostic packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

diagnostic packet

In X.25, a packet used by some networks to indicate error conditions under
circumstances where the usual methods of indication are inappropriate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.83. diagnostic tool ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

diagnostic tool

One of the base operating system utilities designed to gather and process data
to help identify the cause of a problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.84. dial utilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dial utilities

User programs that establish data connections between workstations over a
switched network for applications to send and receive data over the
connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.85. DIF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIF

Data interchange format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.86. digital data service adapter (DDSA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

digital data service adapter (DDSA)

In data communications, a device used when sending and receiving data using a
nonswitched digital data system.  Contrast with modem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.87. Digital Intel Xerox (DIX) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Digital Intel Xerox (DIX)

A network protocol for Ethernet communications developed by Digital Equipment
Corporation**, Intel Corporation, and Xerox**.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.88. DIP switch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In an IBM personal computer, a two-position switch on a circuit board that is
preset to control certain functions.  The user can change the position of a
dual in-line package (DIP) switch to satisfy special requirements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.89. direct authorization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

direct authorization

An authorization granted directly and specifically to an individual.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.90. direct connect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

direct connect

A type of connection in which two computers are physically connected by a
cable.  No modems are required with this type of connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.91. directed Locate search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

directed Locate search

A search request sent to a specific destination node known to contain a
resource, such as a logical unit, to verify the continued presence of the
resource at the destination node and to obtain the node's connectivity
information for route calculation.  Contrast with broadcast search.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.92. directly-attached device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

directly-attached device

A device that is attached via a cable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.93. direct manipulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

direct manipulation

The action of using the mouse to move graphical representations (OS/2 icons)
around the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.94. directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

directory

 1. A list of the files that are stored on a disk or diskette.  A directory
    also contains information about the file, such as size and date of last
    change.

 2. A named grouping of files in a file system. See also files resource.

 3. In X.25 support, a table that associates X.25 network information about a
    use with a name.

 4. A database in an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) node that lists
    names of resources (in particular, logical units) and records the control
    point (CP) name of the node where each resource is located. See distributed
    directory database and local directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.95. directory table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

directory table

A table maintained by connection manager that lists all the remote parties that
any application can establish a connection to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.96. directory services (DS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

directory services (DS)

 1. A portion of the Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) protocols that
    maintains information about the location of resources in an APPN network.

 2. A component of an APPN node that maintains a directory and manages searches
    of that directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.97. disable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

disable

To make nonfunctional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.98. disabled ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

disabled

Pertaining to the state of a processing unit that prevents the occurrence of
certain types of interruptions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.99. DISC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISC

 1. The transmission control character that is part of the sequence for
    disconnecting a switched line.

 2. In X.25, an unnumbered command frame that is used to terminate the mode
    previously set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.100. discrete profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

discrete profile

An access control profile that protects a single resource such as a printer or
serial device queue. See access control profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.101. disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

disk

A magnetic disk unit.  See also diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.102. diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

diskette

A disk enclosed in a protective container that is removable from the hardware.
See also disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.103. disk operating system (DOS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

disk operating system (DOS)

An operating system for computer systems that use disks and diskettes for
auxiliary storage of programs and data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.104. display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

display

A visual presentation of data.  (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.105. display device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

display device

An output unit that gives a visual representation of data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.106. display point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

display point

Synonym for pixel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.107. display screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

display screen

The part of the display device that displays information visually.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.108. display station pass-through (DSPT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

display station pass-through (DSPT)

A communications function that allows a user to sign on to one system (either
an IBM AS/400* system, IBM System/38, or IBM System/36) from another system
(either an AS/400 system, System/38, or System/36) and use that system's
programs and data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.109. distributed directory database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distributed directory database

The complete listing of all the resources in the network as maintained in the
individual directories scattered throughout an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
(APPN) network. Each node has a piece of the complete directory, but it is not
necessary for any one node to have the entire list. Entries are created,
modified, and deleted through system definition, operator action, automatic
registration, and ongoing network search procedures. Synonymous with
distributed network directory and network directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.110. distributed feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distributed feature

A feature of Communications Manager/2 that allows multiple distributed
workstations to share a single copy of Communications Manager/2 product files
on a file server. This drastically reduces the disk space required on the
distributed workstation to run Communications Manager/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.111. Distributed Function Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Distributed Function Mode

See distributed function terminal (DFT).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.112. distributed function terminal (DFT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distributed function terminal (DFT)

 1. An operational mode that allows multiple concurrent logical terminal
    sessions.

 2. A hardware or software protocol used for communication between a terminal
    and an IBM 3274 or IBM 3174 control unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.113. distributed network directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distributed network directory

Synonym for distributed directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114. distributed transaction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

processing services

distributed transaction processing services

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the set of services that
enables transaction programs to communicate, access remote resources, and aid
in synchronization and error recovery.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.115. distributed workstation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distributed workstation

A workstation that contains a small amount of Communications Manager/2 code and
runs by requesting the additional required code from a file server. A
distributed workstation requires a LAN connection to a file server containing
the Communications Manager/2 product files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.116. distribution panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distribution panel

A wiring board that provides a patch panel function and mounts in a rack.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.117. distribution tape reel (DTR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

distribution tape reel (DTR)

A reel of magnetic tape containing programs or data IBM sends to a customer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.118. DIX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIX

Digital Intel Xerox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.119. DLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DLC

Data link control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120. DLL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DLL

Dynamic link library.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.121. DLR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DLR

Dynamic link routine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.122. DLU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DLU

Destination logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.123. DNIC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DNIC

Data network identification code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.124. domain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

domain

 1. A set of servers that allocates shared network resources within a single
    logical system.

 2. In Systems Application Architecture (SAA), a system services control point
    (SSCP) and the network resources the SSCP controls.

 3. See end-node domain and network-node domain. See also additional server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.125. domain control database (DCDB) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

domain control database (DCDB)

A database that resides on the domain controller and contains files that
describe the current domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.126. domain controller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

domain controller

A server within the domain that provides details of the OS/2 LAN Server to all
other servers and requesters on the domain.  The domain controller is
responsible for coordinating and maintaining activities on the domain. See also
additional server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.127. domain definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

domain definition

A list of network resources and users that can be printed out by the network
administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.128. domain search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

domain search

A search initiated by a network node to all its client Advanced Peer-to-Peer
Networking (APPN) end nodes (that allow such a search) when the network node
receives a broadcast search message identifying an unknown resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.129. DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS

Disk operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.130. DOS mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS mode

The mode that allows the base operating system to run programs written for DOS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.131. dot matrix ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dot matrix

 1. In computer graphics, a two-dimensional pattern of dots used for designing
    an image on the display.

 2. A type of printer that uses a two-dimensional pattern of dots for designing
    an image to be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.132. double-byte character session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

double-byte character session

A display station operating session that uses double-byte character data for
the system to communicate with the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.133. double-byte character set (DBCS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

double-byte character set (DBCS)

A set of characters, used by national languages such as Japanese and Chinese,
that has more symbols than can be represented by the 256 single-byte positions.
Each character is two bytes in length. Contrast with single-byte character set
(SBCS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.134. double-click ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

double-click

To press and release the select button on the pointing device twice in rapid
succession.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.135. doubleword address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

doubleword address

A 4-byte address that includes a segment word and an offset word.  This type of
address is used in OS/2 protect mode and allows a program to access another
program's data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.136. download ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

download

To move data or programs from a host computer to a workstation. Contrast with
upload.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.137. downstream ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

downstream

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the direction of data flow. Contrast with
upstream.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.138. dragging ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dragging

Moving an object on the display screen as if it were attached to the pointer,
performed by holding the select button and moving the pointer.  See also drop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.139. drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

drive

The device used to read and write data on disks or diskettes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.140. drop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

drop

 1. To fix the position of the object that is being dragged by releasing the
    select button on the pointing device or mouse.  See also dragging.

 2. A cable that leads from a faceplate to the distribution panel in a wiring
    closet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.141. DS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DS

Directory services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.142. DSAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DSAP

Destination service access point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.143. DSCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DSCP

Data services command processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.144. DSPT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DSPT

Display station pass-through.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.145. DSQCOMM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DSQCOMM

Serves as an anchor for a return code for a started session and must be
preserved, not modified, by the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.146. DSR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DSR

Data set ready.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.147. DSRB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DSRB

Data services request block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.148. DTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DTE

Data terminal equipment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.149. DTE clear confirmation packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DTE clear confirmation packet

A call supervision packet transmitted by data terminal equipment (DTE) to
confirm the clearing of a call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.150. DTR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DTR

 1. Data terminal ready.

 2. Distribution tape reel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.151. dual in-line package (DIP) switch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dual in-line package (DIP) switch

See DIP switch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.152. dumb modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dumb modem

A modem that has no programmable interface and that does not support autodial.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.153. dump ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dump

To copy data from memory onto an external medium such as a diskette or printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.154. dump diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dump diskette

 1. A diskette that contains a dump (data copied from memory) or that is
    prepared to receive data copied from memory.

 2. In the base operating system, a diskette (created using the CREATEDD
    command) that contains the contents of storage at a specified time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.155. dump services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dump services

In Communications Manager, a menu-driven utility used to make a copy of the
data stored in a portion of memory used by Communications Manager for analysis
by IBM. See also probe trip.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.156. duplex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

duplex

Pertaining to communication in which data can be sent and received at the same
time. Synonymous with full-duplex.  Contrast with half-duplex.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.157. dynamic link library (DLL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dynamic link library (DLL)

A binary file that contains code or data that can be accessed at program load
or run time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.158. dynamic link routine (DLR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dynamic link routine (DLR)

A program or routine that can be loaded by an application or as part of a
program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.159. dynamic linking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dynamic linking

In the base operating system, the delayed linking of a program to a routine so
that the routine is not linked until load or run time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.160. dynamic priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dynamic priority

In the base operating system, pertaining to a priority of a process that is
varied by the operating system.  Contrast with absolute priority.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.161. dynamic priority variation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

dynamic priority variation

The changes in a thread's priority based on the state of the system and the
state of thread relative to the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. E (EBCDIC - external server) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o EBCDIC
o EBCDIC code page number
o ECF
o echo mode
o edit
o EHLLAPI
o element address
o ellipsis
o emphasis
o emulation
o Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface (EHLLAPI)
o enable
o enabled
o enabled CP
o encipher
o encode
o ENCP
o encryption
o end bracket
o end delimiter byte
o end node
o end-node control point (ENCP)
o end-node domain
o end of line (EOL)
o end point TG vector
o end user
o Enhanced Connectivity Facility (ECF)
o enter
o entry field
o entry point
o EOL
o equipment rack
o equipotential bonding
o erase to end of field
o error log
o Escape key
o Ethernet
o even parity
o event
o exchange identification (XID)
o exchange station ID (XID)
o exchange station ID (XID) frame
o exclusive set
o exit
o exit list
o exit value
o express buffering
o expression
o extended address
o extended binary-coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC)
o extended partition
o Extended Services/2
o extended storage
o external resource
o external server


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. EBCDIC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EBCDIC

Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. EBCDIC code page number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EBCDIC code page number

A coded character set consisting of 8-bit coded characters used to translate
information transmitted to and from the host. Synonymous with host code page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. ECF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ECF

Enhanced Connectivity Facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. echo mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

echo mode

In data communications, a mode in which characters are automatically returned
to the transmitting data terminal equipment (DTE) device. Also known as
echoplex mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5. edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

edit

To add, change, delete, or rearrange data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6. EHLLAPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EHLLAPI

Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.7. element address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

element address

A value in the element address field of the network address identifying a
specific resource within a subarea. See subarea address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.8. ellipsis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ellipsis

A symbol (...) used on a window indicating that another window follows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.9. emphasis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

emphasis

Highlighting, color changes, or other visual indicators that serve as visual
cues to users.  For example, a choice may be highlighted to show users a choice
has been selected. See also reverse video.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.10. emulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

emulation

The imitation of all or part of one system by another so that the imitating
system accepts the same data, executes the same programs, and achieves the same
results as the imitated computer system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.11. Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface (EHLLAPI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface (EHLLAPI)

A Communications Manager application programming interface that provides a way
for users and programmers to access the host presentation space.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.12. enable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

enable

To make functional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.13. enabled ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

enabled

 1. Pertaining to the state of a processing unit that allows the occurrence of
    certain types of interruptions.

 2. In the base operating system, to initiate the operation of a circuit or
    device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.14. enabled CP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

enabled CP

A control point's view of a partner control point (CP) when both parallel CP-CP
sessions between the pair are active and ready for exchange of network services
requests and replies.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.15. encipher ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

encipher

To scramble data or convert data to a secret code that masks the meaning of the
data to any unauthorized recipient.  See also encode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.16. encode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

encode

To convert data by the use of a code in such a manner that reconversion to the
original form is possible. (T) See also encipher.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.17. ENCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ENCP

End node control point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.18. encryption ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

encryption

In computer security, the process of transforming data into an unintelligible
form in such a way that the original data either cannot be obtained or can be
obtained only by using a decryption process. See session-level encryption.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.19. end bracket ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end bracket

The value (binary 1) of the end bracket indicator in the request header (RH) of
the first request in the last chain of a bracket; the value denotes the end of
the bracket.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.20. end delimiter byte ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end delimiter byte

The byte of a token or frame that indicates the end.  It consists of a special
recognizable bit arrangement and contains an error indication bit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.21. end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end node

 1. A node of an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network that provides
    network services by an APPN network node.

 2. Synonym for type 2.1 (T2.1) end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.22. end-node control point (ENCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end-node control point (ENCP)

See end-node domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.23. end-node domain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end-node domain

An end-node control point (ENCP), its attached links, and its local logical
units (LUs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.24. end of line (EOL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end of line (EOL)

A cursor-movement function that moves the selection cursor to the rightmost
position on the current line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.25. end point TG vector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end point TG vector

A pair of control vectors representing a transmission group (TG) available at
an end node for use by sessions that terminate in the node.  Such a TG is not
in the network topology database, and one of the purposes of the
Locate/CD-Initiate search is to obtain the end point TG vectors for the nodes
containing the origin and destination logical units (LUs) of a particular
session when either or both origin and destination reside at an end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.26. end user ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end user

The ultimate source or destination of data flowing through an SNA network.  An
end user can be an application program or a workstation operator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.27. Enhanced Connectivity Facility (ECF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enhanced Connectivity Facility (ECF)

A set of programs used for interconnecting IBM personal computers and IBM
System/370* host computers operating in the MVS/XA* or VM/SP environment. These
ECF programs provide a method for sharing resources between workstations and
host systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.28. enter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

enter

An action performed by pressing the Enter key or selecting the Enter push
button. This action causes the computer to receive and process user input.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.29. entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

entry field

A window element, usually highlighted in some manner and usually with its
boundaries indicated, where users type information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.30. entry point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

entry point

 1. The address or label of the first instruction executed on entering a
    computer program, routine, or subroutine. A computer program, routine, or
    subroutine may have a number of different entry points, each perhaps
    corresponding to a different function or purpose. (I)

 2. An SNA node that provides distributed network management support. It sends
    SNA-formatted network management data about itself and the resources it
    controls to a focal point for centralized processing, and it receives and
    executes focal point initiated commands to manage and control its
    resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.31. EOL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EOL

End of line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.32. equipment rack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

equipment rack

A metal stand for mounting network components, such as distribution panels and
IBM 8228 multistation access units (MAU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.33. equipotential bonding ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

equipotential bonding

In cabling, a means of limiting ground potential differences within a building.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.34. erase to end of field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

erase to end of field

A typing action that deletes the character at the cursor position and all
characters in the field to the right of the cursor position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.35. error log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

error log

 1. A file that stores error information for later access. See log.

 2. A file used to record problem diagnosis information about certain hardware
    and programming events. Communications Manager uses FFST/2 to log
    information into this file. See also First Failure Support Technology/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.36. Escape key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Escape key

A key that removes or refreshes the current menu or window without processing
it and returns to a previous menu or window, or updates the refreshed menu or
window.  See also cancel and refresh.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.37. Ethernet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ethernet

The name of a local area network (LAN) protocol that uses the protocol
definitions of Ethernet Digital Intel Xerox (DIX) version 2.0 or IEEE 802.3. In
Communications Manager, ETHERAND is also used for Ethernet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.38. even parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

even parity

A data transmission attribute in which the parity bit of a character frame is
set so that the sum of the binary digits in the character and the parity bit is
even.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.39. event ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

event

An occurrence of significance to a task; for example, the completion of an
asynchronous operation such as an input/output (I/O) operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.40. exchange identification (XID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exchange identification (XID)

A specific type of basic link unit used to convey node and link characteristics
between adjacent nodes.  XIDs are exchanged between link stations before and
during link activation to establish and negotiate link and node characteristics
and, after link activation, to communicate changes in these characteristics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.41. exchange station ID (XID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exchange station ID (XID)

In Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC), a control field command and response
for passing station IDs between a primary and secondary station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.42. exchange station ID (XID) frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exchange station ID (XID) frame

A specific type of basic link unit that is used to convey node and link
characteristics between adjacent nodes. XID frames are exchanged between link
stations before and during link activation to establish and negotiate link and
node characteristics, and, after link activation, to communicate changes in
these characteristics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.43. exclusive set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exclusive set

An option of Remote Operations Service (ROPS) that indicates whether only the
commands in the command list can be processed by ROP Service or none of the
commands in the command list can be processed by ROP Service. See also command
list (CLIST) and command validation table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.44. exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exit

An action that ends the current function and returns to a higher-level
function.  See also cancel and Escape key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.45. exit list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exit list

A list of subroutines that receive control from the base operating system when
a particular process ends, either normally or abnormally.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.46. exit value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

exit value

In the base operating system, a numeric value that a command returns to
indicate whether it completed successfully.  Some commands return exit values
that give other information, such as whether a file exists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.47. express buffering ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

express buffering

A method of improving the likelihood that a ring station will copy a medium
access control (MAC) frame immediately, when the normal receive buffers of the
ring station are full.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.48. expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

expression

An operand or a combination of operands and operators yielding a single value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.49. extended address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

extended address

Synonym for address extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.50. extended binary-coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

extended binary-coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC)

A coded character set consisting of 8-bit coded characters used by host
computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.51. extended partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

extended partition

The area beyond the primary partition.  This area can be divided into smaller
areas or partitions, each of which can be assigned a drive letter and be
accessed as though it were a separate fixed disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.52. Extended Services/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Extended Services/2

See IBM Extended Services/2 for OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.53. extended storage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

extended storage

The storage that supplements system storage. See system storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.54. external resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

external resource

A file, printer, or serial device resource supplied by a server outside the
current domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.55. external server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

external server

A server outside the domain that defines and controls domain resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. F (faceplate - function management header) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o faceplate
o facilities field
o fast path
o fast select
o FAT
o fault domain
o FCB
o feature
o feature group
o FFST/2
o FID field
o FID2
o field
o field delimiters
o field entry message
o FIFO
o file
o file allocation table (FAT)
o file control block (FCB)
o file description
o filemode
o file name
o file name extension
o filespec
o file specification (filespec)
o files resource
o file system
o filetype
o filter
o First Failure Support Technology/2 (FFST/2)
o first-in-first-out (FIFO)
o first-speaker session
o fixed disk
o fixed length
o fixed-length string
o fixed-space font
o flag
o flag sequence
o flow control
o flush
o FMD
o FMH
o focal point
o folder
o font
o format
o format identification (FID) field
o formatted diskette
o formatted program interface
o FORTRAN/2
o forward
o FQPCID
o frame
o frame check sequence
o frame level
o frame-level data circuit-terminating equipment
o frame reject
o full-duplex
o full-screen application
o full-screen mode
o full selector
o full selector offset
o full speed
o fully qualified procedure correlator identifier (FQPCID)
o function
o functional address
o function call
o function key
o function key area
o function key selection
o function management data (FMD)
o function management header (FMH)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. faceplate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

faceplate

A plate for connecting data and voice connectors to a cabling system. It may be
wall- or surface-mounted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. facilities field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

facilities field

In an X.25 packet switching data network, an optional field used by the DTE to
convey information about the call to the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. fast path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fast path

A way to navigate through windows and menus using shortcuts. Fast paths can
include selections using numbers, mnemonics, and function keys. See also
function key and mnemonic.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. fast select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fast select

A packet-switching data network optional facility that allows a greater amount
of call user data to be included on call, call accept, and call clear packets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. FAT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FAT

File allocation table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6. fault domain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fault domain

In IBM Token-Ring Network problem determination, the portion of the ring that
is involved with an indicated error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7. FCB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCB

File control block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8. feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

feature

 1. A programming or hardware option.

 2. A part of an IBM product that can be ordered separately by the customer.

 3. In Communications Manager, a part of a component.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9. feature group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

feature group

In Communications Manager, a group of functions that is installed at the user's
option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10. FFST/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FFST/2

First Failure Support Technology/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11. FID field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FID field

Format identification field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12. FID2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FID2

A field used for traffic that involves non-Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
devices, and occurs between adjacent subarea nodes when either or both nodes do
not support explicit-route and virtual-route protocols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.13. field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

field

 1. An area in a record or window used to contain data.

 2. A specified area in a record or window used to contain a particular
    category of data, for example a group of card columns in which a wage rate
    is recorded.

 3. In the IBM 3270 data stream, a group of consecutive positions on a
    presentation space with similar characteristics.  These characteristics are
    defined by the field attribute byte at the beginning of the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14. field delimiters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

field delimiters

Symbols, usually brackets, surrounding or within an entry field in a host panel
that indicate the limits of an entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.15. field entry message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

field entry message

A message that is displayed when an attempt has been made to violate a rule or
limitation of an entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.16. FIFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIFO

First-in-first-out.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.17. file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file

A collection of related data that is stored and retrieved by an assigned name.
See also data set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.18. file allocation table (FAT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file allocation table (FAT)

In IBM personal computers, a table used to allocate space on a disk for a file.
This can then be used to locate and chain together parts of the file that may
be scattered on different sectors so that the file can be used in a random or
sequential manner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.19. file control block (FCB) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file control block (FCB)

A record that contains all of the information about a file; for example, its
structure, length, and name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.20. file description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file description

A part of a file where file and field attributes are described.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.21. filemode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

filemode

The third field in the VM/CMS file identifier.  The filemode indicates the mode
letter currently assigned to the virtual disk in which the file resides.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.22. file name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file name

 1. The name used by a program to identify a file.

 2. The portion of the identifying name that precedes the extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.23. file name extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file name extension

For the FAT file system, an optional three-letter code that may be used as the
second part of a DOS or OS/2 file name and that is separated from the file name
by a period (.). Extensions are used to more specifically identify the name and
type of the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.24. filespec ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

filespec

File specification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.25. file specification (filespec) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file specification (filespec)

The full identifier for a file, which includes its drive, path, file name, and
file extension. The format is dependent on the storage medium of a file; for
example, C:\PATH\FILENAME.EXT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.26. files resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

files resource

A directory or subdirectory on a server that contains programs or data files
that can be made available to users. See also directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.27. file system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file system

The collection of files and file management structures on a physical or logical
mass storage device, such as a disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.28. filetype ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

filetype

The second field in the VM/CMS file identification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.29. filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

filter

A device or program that modifies data, signals, or material in accordance with
specified criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.30. First Failure Support Technology/2 (FFST/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

First Failure Support Technology/2 (FFST/2)

A subsystem containing a set of API functions that Communications Manager and
other applications can use for problem determination. FFST/2 functions include
logging and displaying errors and messages, formatting and routing generic
alerts, and generating data dumps. See also problem determination aids, probe,
and error log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.31. first-in-first-out (FIFO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

first-in-first-out (FIFO)

A queueing technique in which the next item to be retrieved is the item that
has been queued for the longest time.(A) Contrast with last-in-first-out
(LIFO). See also stack.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.32. first-speaker session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

first-speaker session

The half-session defined at session activation as:

o Able to begin a bracket without requesting permission from the other
  half-session to do so

o Winning contention if both half-sessions attempt to begin a bracket
  simultaneously

Synonym for contention winner. Contrast with bidder session. See also bracket
protocol.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.33. fixed disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fixed disk

A nonremovable medium on which data can be stored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.34. fixed length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fixed length

Pertaining to a characteristic of a file in which all of the records are the
same length.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.35. fixed-length string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fixed-length string

A character or graphic string whose length is specified and cannot be changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.36. fixed-space font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fixed-space font

Synonym for uniformly spaced font. Contrast with proportionally spaced font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.37. flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

flag

 1. A modifier that defines the action of a command.

 2. The action or return from a command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.38. flag sequence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

flag sequence

A unique sequence of 8 bits  (0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0)  used to delimit the opening and
closing of a frame. A single flag is sufficient to end one frame and begin
another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.39. flow control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

flow control

 1. The procedure for controlling data transfer rate.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the process of managing the rate at
    which data traffic passes between components of the network.  The purpose
    of flow control is to optimize the rate of flow of message units with
    minimum congestion in the network; that is, neither to overflow the buffers
    at the receiver or at intermediate routing nodes nor to leave the receiver
    waiting for more message units.  See also adaptive session-level pacing and
    session-level pacing.

 3. In communications, the process of controlling the flow of data that passes
    between components of the network. See also pacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.40. flush ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

flush

To delete, erase, or remove.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.41. FMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FMD

Function management data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.42. FMH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FMH

Function management header.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.43. focal point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

focal point

 1. An entry point that provides centralized management and control for other
    entry points for one or more network management categories.

 2. An entry point that provides centralized management and control for other
    entry points within its sphere of control for one or more network
    management categories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.44. folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

folder

In OS/2, an object on the desktop that contains other objects, such as
programs, data files, or devices. See also program group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.45. font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

font

A particular style of typeface that contains definitions of character sets,
marker sets, and pattern sets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.46. format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

format

 1. A specific arrangement of a set of data.

 2. In the base operating system, a command used to prepare a diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.47. format identification (FID) field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

format identification (FID) field

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a field in each transmission header (TH)
that indicates the format of the TH; that is, the presence or absence of
certain fields.  Transmission header formats differ in accordance with the
types of nodes they pass between.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.48. formatted diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

formatted diskette

A diskette on which track and sector control information has been written.
Contrast with unformatted diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.49. formatted program interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

formatted program interface

The 3270 emulation support that converts 3270 data streams into a display image
for user-written programs.  Contrast with unformatted program interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.50. FORTRAN/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORTRAN/2

See IBM FORTRAN/2*


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.51. forward ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

forward

A scrolling action that displays information below the currently visible
information.  Contrast with backward.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.52. FQPCID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FQPCID

Fully qualified procedure correlator identifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.53. frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

frame

 1. In high-level data link control (HDLC), the sequence of contiguous bits
    bracketed by and including the opening and closing flag (01111110).  Frames
    are used to transfer data and control information across a data link.

 2. A data structure that consists of fields predetermined by a protocol for
    the transmission of user data and control data. Synonymous with data frame.

 3. In X.25 packet-switching data networks, the contiguous sequence of 8-bit
    bytes delimited by beginning and ending flags.  Frames are used at the
    frame level (level 2) of the X.25 protocol to transport information that
    performs control functions, data transfers, and transmission checking.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.54. frame check sequence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

frame check sequence

 1. A field immediately preceding the closing flag sequence of a frame that
    contains a bit sequence checked by the receiver to detect transmission
    errors.

 2. In Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) and X.25, 16 bits in a frame that
    contain transmission-checking information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.55. frame level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

frame level

Synonym for link level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.56. frame-level data circuit-terminating equipment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

frame-level data circuit-terminating equipment

In a packet switching data network, the equipment at the exchange that manages
the network connection side of the protocol at the frame (or link) level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.57. frame reject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

frame reject

In X.25, a control field that is used to indicate an error condition that
cannot be recovered by the retransmission of identical frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.58. full-duplex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

full-duplex

Synonym for duplex. Contrast with half-duplex.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.59. full-screen application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

full-screen application

An application program that uses a screen group.  It cannot run in a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.60. full-screen mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

full-screen mode

A form of screen presentation in which the contents of an entire screen can be
displayed at once.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.61. full selector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

full selector

A 16-bit index pointer in a descriptor table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.62. full selector offset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

full selector offset

A 32-bit value consisting of a 16-bit index pointer in a descriptor table and a
16-bit offset within the address space.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.63. full speed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

full speed

The top-rated speed of transmission for a piece of equipment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.64. fully qualified procedure correlator identifier (FQPCID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

fully qualified procedure correlator identifier (FQPCID)

A network-unique identifier that is used for:

o Correlating messages sent between nodes, such as correlating a Locate search
  request with its replies

o Identifying a session for problem determination and resolution

o Identifying a session for accounting, auditing, and performance monitoring
  purposes

The identifier is normally assigned at the node that contains the logical unit
(LU) for which a procedure or session is initiated, but may be assigned by the
network node that is providing network services to that end node.  The FQPCID
consists of a fixed-length correlator concatenated with the network-qualified
name of the control point that generated the correlator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.65. function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function

A specific purpose of an entity or its characteristic action, such as a scalar
function.  See built-in function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.66. functional address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

functional address

A subset of group addresses or MAC service access points (MSAPs) that is
encoded in bit-significant format, thereby allowing multiple individual groups
to be designated by a single address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.67. function call ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function call

A programmable interface in which one module (typically an application) calls
another (typically a dynamic link library) to perform a task. An API consists
of one or more function calls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.68. function key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function key

A key that causes a specified sequence of operations to be performed when it is
pressed.  See also fast path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.69. function key area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function key area

The area at the bottom of a host panel that identifies function key assignments
that are available on that panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.70. function key selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function key selection

See function key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.71. function management data (FMD) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function management data (FMD)

A request/response unit (RU) category used for end-user data exchanged between
logical units (LUs) and for requests and responses exchanged between network
services components of LUs, physical units (PUs) and control points (CPs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.72. function management header (FMH) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

function management header (FMH)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), one or more headers optionally present
in the leading request units (RUs) of an RU chain that allow one half-session
to:

o Select a destination at the session partner and control the way the end-user
  data it sends is handled at the destination

o Change the destination or the characteristics of the data during the session

o Transmit between session partners status or user information about the
  destination (for example, a program or device)

FMHs can be used with LU types 1, 4, and 6.2 protocols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. G (gateway - group SAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o gateway
o gateway function
o gateway session
o GCCI
o GDDM
o GDF
o GDS variable
o GDT
o general data stream (GDS) variable
o general help
o generic alert
o generic profile
o global descriptor table (GDT)
o grant
o Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM)
o graphic character
o graphic character set
o graphics
o graphics data file (GDF)
o graphics field
o graphics text
o graying
o group
o group access list
o group address
o group heading
o group ID
o group SAP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. gateway ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

gateway

In communications, a functional unit that connects two computer networks of
different network architectures. (T) See also bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. gateway function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

gateway function

 1. A capability of a subarea node to provide protocol support to connect two
    or more subarea networks.

 2. The component that provides this capability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3. gateway session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

gateway session

A session from any LU to an SNA host through the SNA gateway. See also SNA
gateway.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.4. GCCI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GCCI

Generalized Call Control Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5. GDDM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GDDM*

Graphical data display manager*.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.6. GDF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GDF

Graphics data file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.7. GDS variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GDS variable

General data stream variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.8. GDT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GDT

Global descriptor table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.9. general data stream (GDS) variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

general data stream (GDS) variable

A type of request unit (RU) substructure that is preceded by an identifier and
a length field and includes either application data, user control data, or
SNA-defined control data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.10. general help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

general help

A choice that gives a user a brief overview of each action or task, or both,
that the user can perform within a window. See contextual help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.11. generic alert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

generic alert

A product-independent method of encoding alert data by using textual data, and
by using code points that index short units of stored text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.12. generic profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

generic profile

An access control profile that allows protection of a directory and its
subdirectories and files.  Only file resources can be protected by generic
profiles. See access control profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.13. global descriptor table (GDT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

global descriptor table (GDT)

A set of data structures used by OS/2 to manage memory in protected mode
environment. Specifically, the GDT contains memory descriptors that are common
to all tasks in the system and provide linkage for accessing OS/2 system
services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.14. grant ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

grant

To give authority to a user ID or group ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.15. Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM)

A function of the host operating system that processes both text and graphics
for output on a display, printer, or plotter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.16. graphic character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graphic character

 1. A visual representation of a character, other than a control character,
    that is normally produced by writing, printing, or displaying.

 2. A character that can be displayed or printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.17. graphic character set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graphic character set

A set of graphic characters in a code page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.18. graphics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graphics

A picture defined in terms of graphics primitives and graphics attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.19. graphics data file (GDF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graphics data file (GDF)

A picture definition in a coded format used internally by the graphical data
display manager (GDDM) and optionally providing the user with a lower level
programming interface than the GDDM application programming interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.20. graphics field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graphics field

A field used for graphics, for example, the part of the display screen or the
paper used for pictures and graphics text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.21. graphics text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graphics text

Text displayed by an application program using a graphics symbol set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.22. graying ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

graying

A form of emphasis that tells users which items are currently unavailable for
selection because selection would violate some condition.  Graying is
accomplished by reducing the contrast between the choice and its background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.23. group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

group

In User Profile Management, a logical organization of users that have IDs
according to activity or resource access authority.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.24. group access list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

group access list

A list of groups and the associated access authorities for each group in the
list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.25. group address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

group address

An address assigned to a collection of service access points (SAPs), either
link service access points (LSAPs) or MAC service access points (MSAPs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.26. group heading ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

group heading

The words identifying a group of related selection fields or entry fields.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.27. group ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

group ID

An ID that relates to rights given to a group profile to access objects,
resources, or functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.28. group SAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

group SAP

A single address assigned to a group of service access points (SAPs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. H (half-duplex - hot spot) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o half-duplex
o half-session
o handle
o hang
o hard error
o HDLC
o header
o heap
o Help
o help for help
o help index
o help window
o hex
o hexadecimal (hex)
o hidden field
o hierarchical network
o high-level data link control (HDLC)
o high-level language Application Programming Interfaces (HLLAPI)
o history file
o HLLAPI
o holding
o home position
o homologation
o hook
o hook chain
o hop
o hop count
o hop count limit
o host code page
o host computer
o host node
o host presentation space
o host processor
o host program
o host prompt character pacing
o host support
o host system
o hot carrier
o hot key
o hot spot


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. half-duplex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

half-duplex

Pertaining to two-way communication, where only one user transmits at a time.
Contrast with full-duplex and duplex.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. half-session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

half-session

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a component that provides function
    management data services, data flow control, and transmission control for
    one of the sessions of a network accessible unit. See primary half-session,
    secondary half-session, and session.

 2. A session-layer component consisting of the combination of data flow
    control and transmission control components comprising one end of a
    session. See primary half-session, secondary half-session, and session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

handle

An identifier that represents an object, such as a device, window, or file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. hang ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hang

Deprecated term for suspend.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. hard error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hard error

 1. An unrecoverable error where a workstation is stopped.

 2. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, an error on the network that requires that
    the network be reconfigured or that the source of the error be removed
    before the ring can resume reliable operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. HDLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HDLC

High-level data link control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.7. header ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

header

 1. System-defined control information that precedes user data.

 2. The portion of a message that contains control information for the message,
    such as one or more destination fields, name of the originating station, or
    a character string indicating the type of message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.8. heap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

heap

An area of free memory available for dynamic allocation by a program.  The size
of a heap varies, depending on the memory requirements of a program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.9. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help

A feature that provides assistance and information to the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.10. help for help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

help for help

Deprecated term for Using help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.11. help index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

help index

General information listed by topic that is available to users who want more
information for the current application. The help index is accessed from a
window menu bar or by pressing F11.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.12. help window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

help window

The information displayed on a screen in response to a help request from a
user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.13. hex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hex

Hexadecimal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.14. hexadecimal (hex) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hexadecimal (hex)

Pertaining to a numbering system with a base of 16; valid numbers use the
digits 0 through 9 and characters A through F, where A represents 10 and F
represents 15.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.15. hidden field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hidden field

A field in a display file that is passed to and from the program but is not
sent to the display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.16. hierarchical network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hierarchical network

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a multiple-ring network configuration providing
only one path through intermediate rings between source rings and destination
rings.  Contrast with mesh network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.17. high-level data link control (HDLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

high-level data link control (HDLC)

In data communication, the use of a specified series of bits to control data
links in accordance with the International Standards for HDLC, International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) 3309 Frame Structure, and ISO 4335
Elements of Procedures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.18. high-level language application programming interface (HLLAPI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

high-level language application programming interface (HLLAPI)

A programming interface that usually operates in conjunction with an emulator,
such as 3270 emulation, and allows interaction between a host session and an
application program running in a personal computer session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.19. history file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

history file

A file providing a record of system installation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.20. HLLAPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HLLAPI

High-level language application programming interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.21. holding ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

holding

A status indicating that either a long-running command has completed processing
or a command issued directly through Remote Operations Service (ROPS) is
complete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.22. home position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

home position

 1. The first position of the first input field on the display.

 2. The position a cursor normally returns to.

 3. The position (far left) the print head moves to after the printer is turned
    on and the Stop or Reset button is pressed.

 4. The first item in a list or the first line of help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.23. homologation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

homologation

The enforcement of certain country or network requirements regarding the use of
telephone circuits, X.25 packet switching networks, and other networks by
computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.24. hook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hook

 1. In programming, an area of program code that makes connections with other
    program codes possible.

 2. A mechanism by which procedures are called when certain events occur in the
    system; for example, the filtering of mouse and keyboard input before it is
    received by an application program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.25. hook chain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hook chain

A sequence of hook procedures that are chained together so that each event is
passed in turn to each procedure in the chain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.26. hop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hop

In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), a portion of a route that has no
intermediate nodes.  A hop consists of only a single transmission group
connecting adjacent nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.27. hop count ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hop count

The number of nodes through which a frame has passed on the way to its
destination.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.28. hop count limit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hop count limit

The maximum number of nodes through which a frame can pass on the way to its
destination.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.29. host code page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host code page

A synonym for EBCDIC code page number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.30. host computer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host computer

 1. In a computer network, a computer providing services such as computation,
    database access, and network control functions.

 2. The primary or controlling computer in a multiple computer installation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.31. host node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host node

 1. A node at which a host processor is situated.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a subarea node that contains a
    system services control point (SSCP); for example, an IBM System/370
    computer with OS/VS2 and VTAM*.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.32. host presentation space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host presentation space

The 3270 emulation presentation interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.33. host processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host processor

A processor that controls all or part of a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.34. host program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host program

In Communications Manager, a program that runs on a host computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.35. host prompt character pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host prompt character pacing

A method in which a system transmitting a file sends only one block of data at
a time and waits for the receiving system to send an agreed upon character
before transmitting the next block of data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.36. host support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host support

The facilities a host processor makes available to attached terminals,
processors, and other devices, such as problem determination aids and database
facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.37. host system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host system

 1. A data processing system that is used to prepare programs and the operating
    environments for use on another computer or controller.

 2. The data processing system a network is connected to that the system can
    communicate with.

 3. The controlling or highest level system in a data communication
    configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.38. hot carrier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hot carrier

Synonym for continuous carrier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.39. hot key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hot key

A key or combination of keys used to switch between sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.40. hot spot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

hot spot

The part of the pointer, usually the tip, that must touch an object before it
can be selected.  See also action point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. I (IBM AS/400 PC Support - ISR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o IBM AS/400 PC Support
o IBM COBOL/2
o IBM C Set/2
o IBM FORTRAN/2*
o IBM Macro Assembler/2 (MASM)
o IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2)
o IBM Operating System/2 LAN Server
o IBM Pascal/2
o IBM PC Network
o IBM ServiceLine
o IBM Support Center
o IBM Token-Ring Network
o icon
o IDLC
o idles
o IEEE 802.2 interface
o I-field byte
o I format
o I frame
o ILU
o image definition
o image definition file
o image profile
o inactive program
o incoming allocate
o incoming Attach
o incoming call
o incoming call packet
o independent LU
o IND$FILE
o informational message
o information device context
o Information-field (I-field) byte
o information (I) format
o information (I) frame
o information processing system
o initial field value
o initialize
o initial program load (IPL)
o initiating logical unit (ILU)
o inline code
o input
o input device
o input field
o input focus
o input mode
o input-output privilege level (IOPL)
o insert (Ins) mode
o installation
o integer
o integrated data link control (IDLC)
o integrated services digital network (ISDN)
o integrity
o interactive
o interactive graphics
o interactive processing
o interactive program
o interactive session
o Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
o interface
o intermediate block check
o intermediate network node
o intermediate node
o intermediate routing function
o intermediate routing network
o intermediate routing node
o intermediate session routing (ISR)
o intermediate telephone closet
o internal resource
o International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
o International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT)
o internode routing
o interprocess communication
o interrupt
o interrupt packet
o interrupt time
o intranode routing
o IOPL
o IPL
o IPM
o IPR
o ISDN
o ISDN Directory Table
o ISO
o isolated pacing message (IPM)
o isolated pacing response (IPR)
o isolation level
o ISPF
o ISR


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. IBM AS/400 PC Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM AS/400 PC Support

The IBM licensed program that provides AS/400* system functions to an attached
personal computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. IBM COBOL/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM COBOL/2*

A high-level programming language, based on English, that was designed for use
on a personal computer and is used primarily for business applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. IBM C Set/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM C Set/2

A language that was designed for use on a personal computer and is used to
develop software applications in compact, efficient code that can be run on
different types of computers with minimal change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. IBM Extended Services for OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Extended Services for OS/2

A program containing Database Manager and Communications Manager that runs on
the OS/2 program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. IBM FORTRAN/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM FORTRAN/2*

A programming language that was designed for use on a personal computer and is
primarily used to express computer programs by arithmetic formulas.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6. IBM Macro Assembler/2 (MASM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Macro Assembler/2 (MASM*)

A language that translates assembler language source code into an object module
containing machine language understood by the computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.7. IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*)

Pertaining to the IBM licensed program that can be used as the operating system
for personal computers. The OS/2 licensed program can perform multiple tasks at
the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.8. IBM Operating System/2 LAN Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Operating System/2 LAN Server

A program that allows resources to be shared with other computers on the
network. See server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9. IBM Pascal/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Pascal/2

A high-level general-purpose programming language, related to ALGOL. Programs
written in IBM Pascal/2 are block structured, consisting of independent
routines. Primarily designed for use on a personal computer, this structure
allows the program to run on different computers with little or no
modification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.10. IBM PC Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM PC Network

IBM PC Network is a low-cost broadband network that allows attached IBM
personal computers to communicate and to share resources. An IBM PC Network
definition is used to support broadband and baseband networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.11. IBM ServiceLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM ServiceLine

An electronic database and problem-reporting utility available to IBM service
coordinators.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.12. IBM Support Center ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Support Center

The support center available to service coordinators to help resolve program
defects on supported software.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.13. IBM Token-Ring Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Token-Ring Network

A high-speed, star-wired local area network topology in which access to the
ring is controlled by possession of a circulating token. A variety of products
can be connected through the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.14. icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

icon

A pictorial representation of a choice for the user to select.  Icons can
represent things (such as a document or file) the user wants to work on and
actions the user wants to perform.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.15. IDLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IDLC

integrated data link control (IDLC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.16. idles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

idles

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the signals sent when neither frames nor tokens
are being transmitted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.17. IEEE 802.2 interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IEEE 802.2 interface

An interface adhering to the 802.2 logical link control (LLC) standard of the
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). This standard is one
of several standards for local area networks approved by the IEEE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.18. I-field byte ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

format

I-field byte

Information-field byte.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.19. I format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

I format

Information format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.20. I frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

I frame

Information frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.21. ILU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ILU

Initiating logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.22. image definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

image definition

The details of an image that identify it to the domain and tell the local area
network (LAN) software that you intend to create an image.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.23. image definition file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

image definition file

A text file that contains the names of files used to produce an image. It
consists of an image name, a description of the image, and its is defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.24. image profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

image profile

The details of an image that identify it to the domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.25. inactive program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

inactive program

A program that has been started but is suspended so that it is no longer
running.  Contrast with active program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.26. incoming allocate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

incoming allocate

See attach.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.27. incoming Attach ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

incoming Attach

See attach.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.28. incoming call ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

incoming call

A call arriving at a data terminal equipment (DTE). Contrast with outgoing
call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.29. incoming call packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

incoming call packet

A call supervision packet transmitted by a data circuit-terminating equipment
(DCE) to inform a called data terminal equipment (DTE) that another DTE has
requested a call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.30. independent LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

independent LU

A logical unit (LU) that is not controlled by a Systems Network Architecture
(SNA) host system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.31. IND$FILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IND$FILE

IND$FILE or IND#FILE is the default name for the IBM host file transfer program
(in the SBCS environment) used by the host computer to communicate with
Communications Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.32. informational message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

informational message

A message that is not the result of an error condition; for example, a message
that gives the status of a job or operation and does not require a response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.33. information device context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

information device context

A logical description of a data destination other than the screen (for example,
a printer or plotter), but where no output occurs.  Its purpose is to satisfy
queries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.34. Information-field (I-field) byte ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Information-field (I-field) byte

The data within the information field of a transmitted or received sequenced
data frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.35. information (I) format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

information (I) format

A sequenced format used for information transfer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.36. information (I) frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

information (I) frame

A frame in I format used for numbered information transfer of data and control
information across a data link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.37. information processing system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

information processing system

A system, including computer systems and associated personnel, that in
conjunction with data processing operations performs operations on information;
for example, automated office operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.38. initial field value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

initial field value

The information in an entry field provided by an application when the field is
first presented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.39. initialize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

initialize

 1. To set counters, switches, addresses, or contents of storage to 0 or other
    starting values at the beginning of, or at prescribed points in, the
    operation of a computer routine. (A)

 2. To prepare an adapter for use by a program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.40. initial program load (IPL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

initial program load (IPL)

 1. The initialization procedure that starts an operating system.

 2. The process of loading programs and preparing a system to run jobs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.41. initiating logical unit (ILU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

initiating logical unit (ILU)

The logical unit (LU) that first requests that a session be set up.  The ILU
may be one of the LUs that will participate in the session, or it may be a
third-party LU.  If it is one of the session participants, the ILU is also
called the origin LU (OLU). See also origin logical unit (OLU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.42. inline code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

inline code

In a program, instructions that are executed sequentially, without branching to
routines, subroutines, or other programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.43. input ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

input

The information entered into a computer for processing or storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.44. input device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

input device

In a data processing system, a device such as a keyboard through which data may
be entered into the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.45. input field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

input field

 1. A field that accepts a value.

 2. An unprotected field on a display surface in which data can be entered,
    modified, or erased.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.46. input focus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

input focus

The position on the screen where a user's interaction with the keyboard will
appear. Typically, this position is indicated by a cursor or pointing device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.47. input mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

input mode

A mode in which records can be read from a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.48. input-output privilege level (IOPL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

input-output privilege level (IOPL)

A statement in the CONFIG.SYS file that enables certain application programs to
communicate directly with I/O devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.49. insert (Ins) mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

insert (Ins) mode

An entry mode, obtained by pressing the Insert (Ins) key, that is used for
adding information between characters without deleting existing characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.50. installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

installation

The process of placing one or more OS/2 components or application programs on
the fixed disk of a workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.51. integer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

integer

A positive or negative whole number; for example, one of the numbers 0, +1, -1,
+2, -2,...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.52. integrated data link control (IDLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

integrated data link control (IDLC)

A full-duplex high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol.  It is IBM's
implementation of the CCITT Q.922 standard or Link Access Procedure-Extended
(LAPE).  IDLC can support point-to-point workstation connections over a
full-duplex wide area network (WAN).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.53. integrated services digital network (ISDN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

integrated services digital network (ISDN)

A digital end-to-end telecommunications network that supports multiple services
including, but not limited to, voice and data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.54. integrity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

integrity

The protection of systems, programs, and data from inadvertent or malicious
destruction or alteration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.55. interactive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interactive

Pertaining to the exchange of information between people and computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.56. interactive graphics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interactive graphics

The graphic objects that can be moved or manipulated by a user at a
workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.57. interactive processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interactive processing

A processing method in which each user action causes a response from a program
or the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.58. interactive program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interactive program

A program that is running (active) and can receive input from the user. See
active program. Contrast with noninteractive program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.59. interactive session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interactive session

The group of processes or tasks that currently own the keyboard, mouse,
display, and other interactive input devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.60. Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)

ISPF is an interactive panel-driven application that displays information a
user can view and change.  It provides a powerful editor, as well as several
useful utilities that allow users to allocate, rename, catalog, and delete data
sets. Other utilities allow a user to print data sets or parts of a data set.
ISPF also provides an online help and tutorial facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.61. interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interface

 1. A set of verbs used by a program to communicate with another program.

 2. A shared boundary between two or more entities.  An interface might be a
    hardware component to link two devices or it might be a portion of memory
    or registers accessed by two or more computer programs. See user interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.62. intermediate block check ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate block check

A check that verifies each record in a block, rather than the contents of the
total block, when large blocks of data are received.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.63. intermediate network node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate network node

In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), a node that is part of a route
between an origin LU (OLU) and a destination LU (DLU) but neither contains the
OLU or the DLU nor serves as the network server for either the OLU or DLU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.64. intermediate node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate node

A node that provides intermediate routing services in a Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.65. intermediate routing function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate routing function

A capability within a node that allows it to receive and route path information
units that neither originate from nor are destined for network accessible units
in that node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.66. intermediate routing network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate routing network

See APPN intermediate routing network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.67. intermediate routing node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate routing node

A subarea node containing an intermediate routing function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.68. intermediate session routing (ISR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate session routing (ISR)

A type of intermediate routing function provided by an Advanced Peer-to-Peer
Networking (APPN) network node that provides session-level outage reporting and
flow control for all routes passing through it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.69. intermediate telephone closet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intermediate telephone closet

A room containing connection points for telephone wiring, located between the
main telephone closet and work areas.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.70. internal resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

internal resource

The printers, files, and serial devices defined and controlled within a domain
by a domain controller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.71. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

An organization of national standards bodies from various countries established
to promote development of standards to facilitate international exchange of
goods and services, and develop cooperation in intellectual, scientific,
technological, and economic activity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.72. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT)

An international organization that recommends and publishes standards for the
interconnection of communications equipment. The organization is also known as
the ComitВ Consultatif International TВlВgraphique et TВlВphonique (CCITT).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.73. internode routing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

internode routing

The capability of path control to route path information units (PIUs) from
half-sessions to data link control and from data link control to half-sessions
for sessions between network accessible units (NAUs) that reside in different
nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.74. interprocess communication ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interprocess communication

The exchange of information between processes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.75. interrupt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interrupt

A suspension of a process, such as the execution of a computer program caused
by an event external to that process, performed in such a way that the process
can be resumed. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.76. interrupt packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interrupt packet

A packet, used in an interrupt procedure, that allows a data terminal equipment
(DTE) to transmit data to a remote DTE without following the flow control
procedure that applies to data packets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.77. interrupt time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

interrupt time

The code that is executed as a result of an interrupt; the thread of execution
does not belong to a process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.78. intranode routing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

intranode routing

The capability of path control to route path information units (PIUs) for
sessions between network accessible units (NAUs) that reside in the same node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.79. IOPL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IOPL

Input-output privilege level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.80. IPL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IPL

Initial program load.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.81. IPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IPM

Isolated pacing message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.82. IPR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IPR

Isolated pacing response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.83. ISDN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ISDN

Integrated services digital network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.84. ISDN Directory Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ISDN Directory Table

The table maintained by the connection manager that lists the remote parties to
which any application can establish a connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.85. ISO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ISO

International Organization for Standardization.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.86. isolated pacing message (IPM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

isolated pacing message (IPM)

A session-level message sent independently of a particular request or response
that indicates a need or readiness for action on the part of a session partner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.87. isolated pacing response (IPR) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

isolated pacing response (IPR)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a response to a session-level pacing
request, sent independently of any particular request without correlation of
sequence numbers, that signals readiness of the receiver to receive an
additional pacing group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.88. isolation level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

isolation level

The degree to which a unit of work is isolated from the updating operations of
other units of work.  See also cursor stability and uncommitted read.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.89. ISPF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ISPF

Interactive System Productivity Facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.90. ISR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ISR

Intermediate session routing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. J (jack - journal) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o jack
o JETBEUI
o journal


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. jack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

jack

A connecting device to which a wire or wires of a circuit can be attached and
arranged for insertion of a plug.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. JETBEUI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JETBEUI

Transport and network layer function conforming to the 3Com/Microsoft NDIS
standard. JETBEUI converts network control blocks into network frames and
delivers them to the IEEE 802.2 sublayer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. journal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

journal

A file used to record changes made in a system. Synonym for log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. K (kanji - kilobyte) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o kanji
o Kb
o KB
o Kbps
o kernel
o keyboard
o keyboard mapping
o keyboard remapping
o keyboard style
o keylock
o keys help
o keyword
o kilobit (Kb)
o kilobits per second (Kbps)
o kilobyte (KB)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1. kanji ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

kanji

A character set consisting of symbols used in Japanese ideographic alphabets.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2. Kb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Kb

Kilobit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3. KB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KB

Kilobyte.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.4. Kbps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Kbps

kilobits per second (Kbps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.5. kernel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

kernel

The part of an operating system that performs basic functions such as
allocating hardware resources. See Communications Manager Kernel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.6. keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keyboard

A systematic arrangement of keys by which a machine is operated or by which
data is entered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.7. keyboard mapping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keyboard mapping

A table or profile containing the function definitions assigned to keys on a
keyboard for use in emulation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.8. keyboard remapping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keyboard remapping

A Communications Manager facility that allows users to change the key
assignments on the keyboard they are using for emulation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.9. keyboard style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keyboard style

The manner in which the keyboard key assignments are changed to match a
particular keyboard type or user-defined arrangement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.10. keylock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keylock

A Communications Manager function that controls access to configuration data
and some advanced functions. See also lock and service key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.11. keys help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keys help

A selection in the help index that gives users a listing of the key assignments
for the current application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.12. keyword ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

keyword

One of the predefined words of a computer command language or an application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.13. kilobit (Kb) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

kilobit (Kb)

A term meaning 1000 bits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.14. kilobits per second (Kbps) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

kilobits per second (Kbps)

A measure used to specify data transfer rate in kilobits per second.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.15. kilobyte (KB) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

kilobyte (KB)

A term meaning 1024 bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. L (label - LU 6.2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o label
o LAN
o LANACS
o LAN adapter
o LAN Adapter and Protocol Support
o language interface module (LIM)
o LAN Network Manager
o LAN Over Coax
o LAN Requester
o LAN Services
o LAP
o LAPB
o LAPE
o LAPS
o last-in-first-out (LIFO)
o layer
o LDT
o leading zero
o leased line
o least-weight route
o LEN
o LEN end node
o LEN node
o LFSID
o license
o LIFO
o LIM
o limited broadcast
o limited resource link
o line data rate
o line feed
o line speed
o lines per inch (LPI)
o line switching
o line type
o link
o link access procedure (LAP)
o link access protocol-balanced (LAPB)
o linkage editor
o link connection
o link connection network
o link-edit
o linked list
o link level
o link protocol
o link protocol converter (LPC)
o link protocol data unit (LPDU)
o link service access point (LSAP)
o link station
o link station role
o LLC
o LLC protocol
o LLU
o load
o load module
o load time
o load-time dynamic linking
o lobe
o lobe logic
o lobe receptacle
o local
o local administrator
o local area network (LAN)
o Local Area Network Asynchronous Connection Server (LANACS)
o local busy
o local controller
o local descriptor table (LDT)
o local directory database
o local-form session identifier (LFSID)
o local initiation
o local location name
o local logical unit (LLU)
o local logical unit profile
o local session identification
o local station address
o local topology database
o local transaction program
o local variable
o local workstation
o Locate
o Locate/CD-Initiate
o Locate chain
o Locate search
o Locate search message
o Locate search reply
o Locate search request
o lock
o log
o logging on
o logical adapter number
o logical channel
o logical device
o logical link
o logical link control (LLC)
o logical record
o logical terminal
o logical unit (LU)
o logical unit 6.2 (LU 6.2)
o logical unit profile
o logo
o logoff
o logon
o long-running
o long-running minimum time
o long string
o loop
o low-entry networking (LEN)
o LPC
o LPDU
o LPI
o LSAP
o LU
o LUA
o LU-LU session
o LU type
o LU 0
o LU 1
o LU 2
o LU 3
o LU 6.2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

label

 1. The name in the disk or diskette directory that identifies a file.

 2. In programming, the field of an instruction that assigns a symbolic name to
    the location at which the instruction begins.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN

Local area network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3. LANACS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LANACS

Local Area Network Asynchronous Connection Server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4. LAN adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN adapter

A card installed in a personal computer that is used to attach it to a local
area network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5. LAN Adapter and Protocol Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN Adapter and Protocol Support

 1. A component that allows you to configure and make changes to your network
    adapters and protocols to enhance network performance.

 2. A subsystem that includes the software that manages and controls the
    network adapter cards, including the device drivers for those cards as well
    as the protocols that are used to communicate with other adapters on the
    network.  Changing configuration parameters related to this sub-system can
    enhance network performance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6. language interface module (LIM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

language interface module (LIM)

A module that allows applications to call application programming interface
functions either directly or indirectly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7. LAN Network Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN Network Manager

The successor product for LAN Manager; an IBM licensed program to manage a
local area network (LAN).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8. LAN Over Coax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN Over Coax

See 3174 Peer Communications Network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.9. LAN Requester ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN Requester

A component of the OS/2 LAN Server program that allows users to access shared
network resources made available by OS/2 LAN Servers. See requester.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.10. LAN Services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN Services

The IBM Operating System/2 LAN Server 2.0 product that can be one of the
following:  LAN Server 2.0-Entry, LAN Server 2.0-Advanced, or LAN Server 2.0
CP.  LAN Services also refers to the components that can be installed with the
preceding products, such as the OS/2 LAN Server, OS/2 LAN Requester, and DOS
LAN Requester.  It does not refer to any one of these products, but to the
services provided by one or a combination of them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.11. LAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAP

Link access procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.12. LAPB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAPB

Link access protocol-balanced.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.13. LAPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAPE

Link access procedure extended.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.14. LAPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAPS

LAN adapter and protocol support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.15. last-in-first-out (LIFO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

last-in-first-out (LIFO)

A queuing technique in which the next item to be retrieved is the item most
recently placed in the queue. (A) Contrast with first-in-first-out (FIFO). See
also queue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.16. layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

layer

In network architecture, a group of services, functions, and protocols that is
one of a set of hierarchically arranged groups and that extends across all
systems that conform to the network architecture. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.17. LDT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LDT

Local descriptor table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.18. leading zero ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

leading zero

A 0 that is displayed beside the leftmost digit in a number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.19. leased line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

leased line

See nonswitched line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.20. least-weight route ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

least-weight route

In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), the one route calculated by
topology and routing services (TRS) to have the lowest total weight after TRS
compares the node characteristics and transmission group (TG) characteristics
of each intermediate node and intermediate TG of each possible route for the
class of service requested and computes the total combined weight for nodes and
TGs in each route.  After a least-weight route is calculated between two given
nodes, the result can be stored to prevent repetition of this calculation in
future route selections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.21. LEN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LEN

Low-entry networking.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.22. LEN end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LEN end node

A type 2.1 (T2.1) end node that provides all Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
end-user services, can attach directly to other T2.1 nodes using peer
protocols, and derives network services implicitly from an adjacent network
node when attached to an APPN network without a session between its local
control point (CP) and another CP; it can also attach to a subarea network as a
peripheral node. Synonymous with LEN node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.23. LEN node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LEN node

Synonym for LEN end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.24. LFSID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LFSID

Local-form session identifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.25. license ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

license

A limited legal right relating to the subject matter in question.  In the event
that limited legal rights are granted by means other than licenses as a local
nation practice, the term is to define a United States equivalent balance of
rights and obligations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.26. LIFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LIFO

Last-in-first-out.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.27. LIM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LIM

Language interface module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.28. limited broadcast ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

limited broadcast

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the forwarding of specially designated broadcast
frames only by bridges that are enabled to forward them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.29. limited resource link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

limited resource link

A link defined by the node operator to be a limited resource; that is, a
resource to remain active only when being used.  Limited resource links are
deactivated when session traffic ceases.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.30. line data rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

line data rate

The physical data transfer rate of a line in a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.31. line feed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

line feed

A control character that causes an output device to move forward one line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.32. line speed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

line speed

The rate at which data is transmitted from one point to another over a
telecommunications line, expressed in bits per second (bps).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.33. lines per inch (LPI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

lines per inch (LPI)

On a printer, a measure of the number of lines per vertical inch of paper; for
example, the IBM 3800 Printing Subsystem can print at 6, 8, or 12 lines per
inch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.34. line switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

line switching

Synonym for circuit switching.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.35. line type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

line type

A type of telecommunications link, either switched or nonswitched.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.36. link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link

 1. The physical medium of transmission, the protocol, and the associated
    devices and programming used to communicate between computers.

 2. To interconnect items of data or portions of one or more computer programs;
    for example, the linking of object programs by a linkage editor, or the
    linking of data items by pointers, devices, and programming.  (T)

 3. In computer programming, the part of a program, in some cases a single
    instruction or an address, that passes control and parameters between
    separate portions of the computer program. (A) (I)

 4. In computer programming, to provide a link.

 5. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the combination of the link
    connection and the link stations joining network nodes. A link includes the
    physical medium of transmission, the protocol, and the associated devices
    and programming; it is both logical and physical.

 6. In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), a synonym for transmission
    group. See link connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.37. link access procedure (LAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link access procedure (LAP)

The link level elements used for data interchange between data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) devices and data terminal equipment (DTE)
devices operating in user classes of service 8 to 11, as specified in CCITT
Recommendation X.1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.38. link access protocol-balanced (LAPB) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link access protocol-balanced (LAPB)

A protocol used for accessing an X.25 network at the link level. LAPB is a
duplex, asynchronous, symmetric protocol, used in point-to-point communication.
It supersedes the earlier link access procedure's protocol.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.39. linkage editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

linkage editor

A computer program for creating load modules from one or more object modules or
load modules by resolving cross-references among the modules, and if necessary,
adjusting addresses. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.40. link connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link connection

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the physical equipment providing two-way
communication between one link station and another link station. Examples of
the physical equipment are a telephone wire or microwave transmission
equipment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.41. link connection network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link connection network

Synonym for connection network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.42. link-edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link-edit

To create a loadable computer program by means of a linkage editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.43. linked list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

linked list

Synonym for chained list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.44. link level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link level

A part of CCITT's X.25 Recommendation that defines the link protocol. The link
protocol is used to get data into and out of the network across the full-duplex
link connecting the subscriber's machine to the network node.  Link access
procedure (LAP) and link access protocol-balanced (LAPB) are the link access
protocols recommended by the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
Committee (CCITT). Synonymous with frame level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.45. link protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link protocol

The rules for sending and receiving data at the link level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.46. link protocol converter (LPC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link protocol converter (LPC)

A device that changes one type of link-level protocol information to another
type of link-level protocol information for processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.47. link protocol data unit (LPDU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link protocol data unit (LPDU)

In a local area network (LAN), the unit of information exchanged between link
stations in different nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.48. link service access point (LSAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link service access point (LSAP)

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the logical point at which an entity in the
logical link control sublayer provides services to the next higher layer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.49. link station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link station

 1. The hardware and software components within a node representing a
    connection to an adjacent node over a specific link.  For example, if node
    A is the primary end of a multipoint line that connects to three adjacent
    nodes, node A will have three link stations representing the connections to
    the adjacent nodes.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the combination of hardware and
    software that allows a node to attach to and provide control for a link.

 3. On a local area network (LAN), part of a service access point (SAP) that
    enables an adapter to communicate with another adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.50. link station role ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

link station role

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the role that a local node assumes for a
link.  Possible roles are primary (or controlling), secondary, or negotiable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.51. LLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LLC

Logical link control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.52. LLC protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LLC protocol

In a local area network (LAN), the part of the protocol that governs the
assembling of transmission frames and their exchange between data stations
independently of how the transmission medium is shared. When doing SNA-SNA
communications over a packet switched data network (PSDN), virtual circuits are
viewed as communication lines with the ability to support multiple sessions.
In this environment the logical link control function provides SNA adjacent
mode functions similar to SDLC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.53. LLU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LLU

Local logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.54. load ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

load

 1. To move data or programs into memory.

 2. To place a diskette into a diskette drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.55. load module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

load module

A computer program in a form suitable for loading into memory for execution.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.56. load time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

load time

 1. The time during which a program is being loaded into memory for execution.

 2. In programming, the time it takes to enter data into memory or working
    registers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.57. load-time dynamic linking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

load-time dynamic linking

A mechanism that enables program modules and their external references to
dynamic link libraries to be loaded into memory when the program is loaded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.58. lobe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

lobe

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the section of cable (which consists of several
segments) that connects a device to an access unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.59. lobe logic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

lobe logic

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the portion of the circuitry within an access
unit that is associated with a single lobe receptacle on the access unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.60. lobe receptacle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

lobe receptacle

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, an outlet on an access unit for connecting a
lobe.  Synonymous with receptacle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.61. local ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local

Residing on the user's node or workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.62. local administrator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local administrator

The second level of user type authority in User Profile Management. A local
administrator does not have the same User Profile Management authority as an
administrator user type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.63. local area network (LAN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local area network (LAN)

Two or more computing units connected for local resource sharing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.64. Local Area Network Asynchronous Connection Server (LANACS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Local Area Network Asynchronous Connection Server (LANACS)

An IBM DOS program that provides asynchronous communication resources (serial
ports) that can be used by workstations on a local area network (LAN).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.65. local busy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local busy

In a local area network (LAN), a state that may occur in the adapter,
indicating that it cannot handle additional frame activity for a given link
station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.66. local controller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local controller

A functional unit within the system that controls the operation of one or more
directly attached input/output devices or communications lines.  Contrast with
remote controller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.67. local descriptor table (LDT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local descriptor table (LDT)

A table that contains access information about the code and data segments for
which a process has addressability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.68. local directory database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local directory database

The set of resources in the network known at a particular node.  The resources
included are all those in the node's domain as well as any cache entries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.69. local-form session identifier (LFSID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local-form session identifier (LFSID)

A dynamically assigned value used at a type 2.1 node to identify traffic for a
particular session using a given transmission group (TG). The LFSID is encoded
in the ODAI, OAF', and DAF' fields of the transmission headers that accompany
session messages exchanged over the TG.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.70. local initiation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local initiation

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a conversation allocated
by a local logical unit (LU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.71. local location name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local location name

The name by which a system is known to other systems in an Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) network.  It is equivalent to an SNA local logical unit
(LLU) name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.72. local logical unit (LLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local logical unit (LLU)

See logical unit (LU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.73. local logical unit profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local logical unit profile

See logical unit profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.74. local session identification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local session identification

A field in a transmission header that indicates the type of session and the
local address of the directly attached logical unit (LU) or physical unit (PU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.75. local station address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local station address

In communications, the location of a station that is attached by a data channel
to a host node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.76. local topology database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local topology database

A database in a type 2.1 node containing an entry for each transmission group
(TG) having at least one end node for an end point.  In an end node, the
database has one entry for each TG connecting to the node. In a network node,
the database has an entry for each TG connecting the network node to an end
node.  Each entry describes the current characteristics of the TG that it
represents.  A network node has both a local and a network topology database
while an end node has only a local topology database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.77. local transaction program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local transaction program

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the transaction program
at the local end of the conversation.  Contrast with remote transaction
program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.78. local variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local variable

A parameter that is defined and used only within a specified portion of the
program in which it is declared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.79. local workstation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

local workstation

A workstation that is connected directly to a system without the need of data
transmission facilities.  Contrast with remote workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.80. Locate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate

Synonym for Locate/CD-Initiate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.81. Locate/CD-Initiate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate/CD-Initiate

An abbreviated term for an internode message that contains one of the following
sets of general data stream (GDS) variables:

o A Locate (X'12C4'), a Find Resource (X'12CA'), and a Cross-Domain Initiate
  (X'12CA') GDS variable used for a network search request.

o A Locate (X'12C4'), a Found Resource (X'12CB'), and a Cross-Domain Initiate
  (X'12CA') GDS variable used for a search reply when a network resource has
  been located.

These message structures correspond to the control program (CP) components that
perform the search of the distributed network directory and establish the
session. The Locate GDS variable contains information used to control the
delivery of the search messages in the network. Synonymous with Locate and
Locate search message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.82. Locate chain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate chain

A temporary logical connection, spanning a series of CP-CP sessions, between
the control point at a search initiator and the control point at the search
destination.  It is set up when a search is initiated, and ends on completion
of the search.  It is used to transport directory search control traffic and
allows route-outage reporting to the search end points if an outage occurs
during the search.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.83. Locate search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate search

The means that directory services in a node uses to find a resource that is not
in that node.  The Locate search enables directory services to ask the
directory services components in other Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN)
nodes for information on the target resource. See broadcast search and directed
Locate search.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.84. Locate search message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate search message

Synonym for Locate/CD-Initiate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.85. Locate search reply ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate search reply

A Locate (X'12C4'), a Found Resource (X'12CB'), and a Cross-Domain Initiate
(X'12CA') GDS variable used when a network resource has been located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.86. Locate search request ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Locate search request

A Locate (X'12C4'), a Find Resource (X'12CA'), and a Cross-Domain Initiate
(X'12CA') GDS variable used to search for a network resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.87. lock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

lock

In Communications Manager, a password-protection system that can be used to
prevent access to some advanced functions. See also keylock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.88. log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

log

 1. To record; for example, to log all messages on the system printer.

 2. A file used to record changes made in a system. Synonymous with journal See
    message log and error log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.89. logging on ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logging on

See logon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.90. logical adapter number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical adapter number

An application-specific concept that allows an application to communicate with
a specific combination of protocol driver and network adapter card. See adapter
number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.91. logical channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical channel

In packet mode operation, a means of two-way simultaneous transmission of data
across a data link. A logical channel represents the path that data travels
from its origin to the network or from the network to its destination. Several
logical channels can be established on the same data link by interleaving the
transmission of packets. Contrast with data communications channel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.92. logical device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical device

 1. An input/output (I/O) device identified in a program by a label or number
    that corresponds to the actual label or number assigned to the device.
    Contrast with physical device.

 2. In the base operating system, a redirected disk, file, printer, or other
    specific device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.93. logical link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical link

The conceptual joining of two nodes for direct communication. Several logical
links may be able to use the same physical hardware.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.94. logical link control (LLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical link control (LLC)

The DLC.LAN sublayer of a local area network that provides two types of data
link control (DLC) operations.  The first type is connectionless service, which
allows information to be sent and received without establishing a link.  The
LLC sublayer does not perform error recovery or flow control for connectionless
service.  The second type of DLC operation is connection-oriented service,
which requires the establishment of a link prior to the exchange of
information.  Connection-oriented service provides sequenced information
transfer, flow control, and error recovery.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.95. logical record ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical record

 1. A record independent of its physical environment.  Portions of the same
    logical record can be located in different physical records, or several
    logical records (or parts of logical records) can be located in one
    physical record.

 2. A record from the standpoint of its content, function, and use rather than
    its physical attributes; that is, one that is defined in terms of the
    information it contains.

 3. A set of related data or words considered to be a record from a logical
    viewpoint. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.96. logical terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical terminal

 1. A destination with a name that is related to one or more physical
    terminals.

 2. The definition of a specific 3270 or 5250 emulation session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.97. logical unit (LU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical unit (LU)

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a port an end user accesses the SNA
    network through to communicate with another end user. End users also access
    the functions provided by system services control points (SSCPs) through
    this port. An LU can support many sessions with other LUs.

 2. A port a user gains access to through the services of a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.98. logical unit 6.2 (LU 6.2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical unit 6.2 (LU 6.2)

 1. A particular type of Systems Network Architecture (SNA) logical unit (LU)
    that provides a connection between resources and transactions programs
    running on different network nodes. See also advanced program-to-program
    communications (APPC).

 2. A type of logical unit that supports general communication between programs
    in a distributed processing environment.  LU 6.2 is characterized by:

   o A peer relationship between session partners

   o Efficient utilization of a session for multiple transactions

   o Comprehensive end-to-end error processing

   o A generic application programming interface consisting of structured verbs
     that are mapped into a product implementation

 3. A type of logical unit that supports sessions between two applications;
    also known as advanced program-to-program communications (APPC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.99. logical unit profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logical unit profile

A set of parameters that define a local and partner logical unit (LU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.100. logo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logo

 1. A letter, combination of letters, or symbol used to represent an entire
    word or words.

 2. The display that identifies the IBM Corporation and the program name on
    licensed programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.101. logoff ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logoff

The procedure by which a user ends a terminal session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.102. logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

logon

The procedure by which a user accesses the system after entering the user ID.
This user ID is then used to determine privileges and authorization to access
protected resources, such as a database or other resources on a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.103. long-running ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

long-running

 1. Pertaining to the state of a command that has been issued.

 2. A condition in which a command issued by the NetView program to Remote
    Operations Service (ROPS) has exceeded the time specified in the
    Long-running minimum time option of Remote Operations Service. The command
    continues to process on the OS/2 workstation, but the NetView program no
    longer tracks the command in anticipation of a response.

    See also long-running minimum time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.104. long-running minimum time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

long-running minimum time

An option of Remote Operations Service (ROPS) indicating the number of seconds
of processing time after which the NetView program no longer tracks a command
it has issued that ROP is processing. See also long-running.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.105. long string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

long string

A fixed or variable-length string where the maximum length is greater than 254
bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.106. loop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

loop

A sequence of instructions executed repeatedly while a certain condition
prevails.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.107. low-entry networking (LEN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

low-entry networking (LEN)

A capability in type 2.1 nodes allowing them to be directly attached to one
another using peer-to-peer protocols and allowing them to support multiple and
parallel sessions between logical units.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.108. LPC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LPC

Link protocol converter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.109. LPDU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LPDU

Link protocol data unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.110. LPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LPI

Lines per inch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.111. LSAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LSAP

Link service access point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.112. LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU

Logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.113. LUA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LUA

Conventional LU application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.114. LU-LU session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU-LU session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a session between two logical units
(LUs) in an SNA network.  An LU-LU session provides communication between two
end users, or between an end user and an LU services component.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.115. LU type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU type

The classification of a logical unit (LU) in terms of the specific subset of
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) protocols and options it supports for a
given session, specifically:

o The mandatory and optional values allowed in the session activation request

o The usage of data stream controls, function management headers (FMHs),
  request unit parameters, and sense data values

o Presentation services protocols such as those associated with FMH usage


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.116. LU 0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU 0

A logical unit (LU) that uses Systems Network Architecture (SNA) transmission
control and SNA flow control layers. Higher-layer protocols are end user and
product defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.117. LU 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU 1

 1. A type of logical unit defined for application program communication with
    single or multiple device data processing workstations (printers or remote
    job entry (RJE) stations).  The data stream conforms to SNA character
    string (SCS) or Document Content Architecture (DCA).

 2. An SNA data stream protocol.  LU 1 is used for logical printers.  It
    contains a type of data called SNA character string (SCS) data and is used
    for printer sessions. See LU 2 and LU 3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.118. LU 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU 2

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a type of logical unit (LU) for an
    application program that communicates with a single display workstation in
    an interactive environment using the SNA 3270 data stream.

 2. An SNA data stream protocol.  LU 2 data stream is used for communication
    between 3270 logical terminals and host computers.  Communications Manager
    3270 emulation sessions use LU 2. See LU 1 and LU 3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.119. LU 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU 3

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a type of logical unit (LU) that
    communicates with a single printer using the SNA 3270 data stream.

 2. An SNA data stream protocol. LU 3 is similar to LU 2 except that LU 3 is
    used for communication between 3270 logical printers and host computers.
    It contains print control information that is not in LU 2.  Printer
    sessions can use LU 3 to communicate with the host computer. See LU 1 and
    LU 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.120. LU 6.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LU 6.2

Logical unit 6.2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. M (MAC - MVS/XA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o MAC
o MAC frame
o machine
o machine language
o MAC protocol
o Macro Assembler/2 (MASM)
o MAC segment
o MAC service data unit (MSDU)
o mainline code
o maintenance analysis procedure (MAP)
o main window
o major event code
o management services (MS)
o management services focal point (MSFP)
o mandatory entry field
o mandatory-fill field
o manual connection
o MAP
o mapped conversation
o mapped conversation verb
o Mark
o marker
o marker symbol
o mark parity
o MASM
o master key
o MAU
o maximize
o maximum frame size
o maximum queue depth
o maximum RU size
o M-bit
o MDT
o media access control (MAC)
o media access control (MAC) service access point (MSAP)
o media access port
o medialess requester
o media window
o medium
o memory
o memory allocation
o memory compaction
o memory device context
o memory mapped I/O (MMIO)
o menu
o menu bar
o menu list
o merge
o mesh network
o message
o message log
o message queue
o message unit (MU)
o messaging name
o metafile
o Micro Channel
o migrate
o minimize
o mixed-character string
o MMIO
o mnemonic
o mode
o mode key
o model profile
o modem
o mode name
o modified data tag (MDT)
o modulator/demodulator
o module
o module definition file
o module enabler
o monitor
o more-data bit (M-bit)
o mouse
o move window
o MS
o MSAP
o MSDU
o MSFP
o MU
o multilingual code page
o multiple-choice selection field
o multiple-domain network
o multiple thread support
o multiple virtual DOS machines
o Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS)
o Multiple Virtual Storage/Extended Architecture (MVS/XA)
o multipoint
o multipoint line
o multiprogramming
o multistation access unit (MAU)
o multitasking
o MVS
o MVS/XA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1. MAC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAC

Media access control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.2. MAC frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAC frame

The frame that controls the operation of the IBM Token-Ring Network and any
ring station operations that affect the ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.3. machine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

machine

A computer on a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.4. machine language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

machine language

A language that can be used directly by a computer without intermediate
processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.5. MAC protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAC protocol

In a local area network (LAN), the part of the protocol that governs access to
the transmission medium independently of the physical characteristics of the
medium, while taking into account the topological aspects of the network to
enable the exchange of data between data stations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.6. Macro Assembler/2 (MASM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Macro Assembler/2

See IBM Macro Assembler/2 (MASM).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.7. MAC segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAC segment

An individual local area network communicating through the medium access
control (MAC) layer within this network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.8. MAC service data unit (MSDU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAC service data unit (MSDU)

The LPDU (the DSAP and SSAP address fields, the control field, and the LPDU
information field, if present) and the routing information field (if the
destination station is located on a different ring).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.9. mainline code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mainline code

See inline code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.10. maintenance analysis procedure (MAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

maintenance analysis procedure (MAP)

A document that gives the customer or service representative a step-by-step
procedure for tracing a symptom to the cause of failure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.11. main window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

main window

Synonym for Desktop folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.12. major event code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

major event code

A code (used for tracing) assigned to major system events, such as opening a
file, writing to a file, and sending output to the display. Major event code
values range from 0 to 255.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.13. management services (MS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

management services (MS)

One of the types of network services in control points and physical units.
Management services are the services provided to assist in the management of
SNA networks, such as problem management, performance and accounting
management, configuration management, and change management.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.14. management services focal point (MSFP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

management services focal point (MSFP)

For any given management services discipline (for example, problem
determination or response time monitoring), the control point that is
responsible for that type of network management data for a sphere of control.
This responsibility may include storing or displaying the data or both.  (For
example, a problem determination focal point is a control point that stores and
displays problem determination data.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.15. mandatory entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mandatory entry field

A field in which a user must type at least one character or number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.16. mandatory-fill field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mandatory-fill field

A field that, once data is entered, must be completely filled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.17. manual connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

manual connection

A communications connection made by manually dialing or answering a phone.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.18. MAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAP

Maintenance analysis procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.19. mapped conversation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mapped conversation

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a conversation between
two transaction programs (TPs) using the APPC mapped conversation application
programming interface (API). In typical situations, end-user transaction
programs use mapped conversation and service transaction programs use basic
conversations. However, either type of program may use either type of
conversation. Contrast with basic conversation. basic conversation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.20. mapped conversation verb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mapped conversation verb

A verb that a transaction program issues when using the advanced
program-to-program communications (APPC) mapped conversation application
programming interface (API).  Contrast with basic conversation verb.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.21. Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mark

A clipboard function that identifies a section of text to be copied or cut.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.22. marker ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

marker

A symbol that replaces the cursor in a host panel area that is no longer
interactive. It marks where the cursor will return when the panel area is made
interactive again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.23. marker symbol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

marker symbol

A symbol centered on a point. Graphs and charts can use marker symbols to
indicate the plotted points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.24. mark parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mark parity

A data communications attribute that refers to sending a logical 1 for the
parity bit in a character frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.25. MASM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MASM

IBM Macro Assembler/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.26. master key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

master key

An access password used to unlock the keylock for Communications Manager. A
user who has access to the master key can also change the service key. See
service key. See also keylock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.27. MAU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAU

Multistation access unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.28. maximize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

maximize

A window-sizing action that makes the window the largest size available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.29. maximum frame size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

maximum frame size

A parameter that specifies in bytes the largest size frame that a bridge can
process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.30. maximum queue depth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

maximum queue depth

The maximum number an application can set the receive queue depth to for an
application name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.31. maximum RU size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

maximum RU size

A Communications Manager parameter that specifies the maximum amount of data
that can be transferred at any one time on a Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.32. M-bit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

M-bit

More-data bit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.33. MDT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MDT

Modified data tag.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.34. media access control (MAC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

media access control (MAC)

A method of controlling hardware access to the logical link control (LLC).  In
a local area network (LAN), the subcomponent of the IEEE 802.2 application
programming interface (API) that supports medium-dependent functions and uses
the services of the physical layer to provide services to logical link control.
MAC includes the media access port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.35. media access control (MAC) service access point (MSAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

media access control (MAC) service access point (MSAP)

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the logical point at which an entity in the MAC
sublayer provides services to the logical link control sublayer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.36. media access port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

media access port

A hardware-addressable component (such as a communication adapter) of a Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) node that gives the node access to a transmission
medium and enables data to pass into and out of the node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.37. medialess requester ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

medialess requester

A requester without a disk drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.38. media window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

media window

The part of the physical device (display, printer, or plotter) a picture is
presented on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.39. medium ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

medium

A physical carrier of electrical energy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.40. memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

memory

 1. The storage on electronic chips; for example, random access memory,
    read-only memory, or registers.

 2. Program-addressable storage from which instructions and other data can be
    loaded directly into registers for subsequent execution or processing. See
    also storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.41. memory allocation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

memory allocation

An operating system function that assigns memory areas to tasks. Synonymous
with storage allocation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.42. memory compaction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

memory compaction

The relocating of allocated memory segments into contiguous locations to place
all free memory in one large block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.43. memory device context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

memory device context

In Presentation Manager, a logical description of a data destination that is a
memory bit map.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.44. memory mapped I/O (MMIO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

memory mapped I/O (MMIO)

In an IBM personal computer, a method of accessing an input or output port as
if it were a memory location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.45. menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

menu

 1. A displayed list of available machine functions for selection by a user.

 2. A displayed list of items from which a user can make a selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.46. menu bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

menu bar

The area near the top of a window, below the title bar and above the rest of
the window, that contains choices that provide access to other menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.47. menu list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

menu list

An extension of a menu-bar choice that displays a list of additional choices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.48. merge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

merge

 1. To combine the items of two or more sets that are each in the same given
    order into one set in that order. (A)

 2. To combine overrides for a file from the first call level up to and
    including a greater call level, producing the override to be applied when
    the file is used.

 3. To combine or unite two sets of data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.49. mesh network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mesh network

In local area network (LAN) communications, a multiple-ring network
configuration providing more than one path through intermediate rings between
source rings and destination rings. Contrast with hierarchical network.
Contrast with hierarchical network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.50. message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

message

 1. The information not requested by users but presented to users by the
    computer in response to a user action or internal process.

 2. In Presentation Manager, a packet of data used for communication between
    Presentation Interface and windowed applications.

 3. In information theory, an ordered series of characters intended to convey
    information.  (A)

 4. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), deprecated term for message unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.51. message log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

message log

A file used to save or log certain types of messages and status information.
See log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.52. message queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

message queue

A sequenced collection of messages waiting to be read by the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.53. message unit (MU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

message unit (MU)

 1. The unit of data processed by any layer; for example, a basic information
    unit, a path information unit, or a request/response unit.

 2. In communications, a generic term for the unit of data processed by any
    layer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.54. messaging name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

messaging name

A name under which messages can be received.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.55. metafile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

metafile

In Presentation Interface, the generic name for the definition of the contents
of a picture. Metafiles are used to allow pictures to be used by other
applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.56. Micro Channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Micro Channel

The bus architecture used by most IBM Personal System/2 or IBM Personal
System/55 computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.57. migrate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

migrate

 1. To move data from one hierarchy of storage to another.

 2. To move to a changed environment, usually to a new release or version of a
    system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.58. minimize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

minimize

A window-sizing action that makes the window the smallest size allowed.
Minimized windows are represented by icons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.59. mixed-character string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mixed-character string

A string containing a mixture of single-byte characters and double-byte
characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.60. MMIO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MMIO

Memory mapped I/O.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.61. mnemonic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mnemonic

A single character, within the text of a choice, identified by an underscore
beneath the character.  When users type the mnemonic of a choice, that choice
is selected. See also fast path. See also fast path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.62. mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mode

 1. In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a set of APPC
    sessions with common properties. Synonymous with transmission service mode.

 2. A method of operation; for example, see NumLock.

 3. See mode name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.63. mode key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mode key

A key, such as the CapsLock, NumLock, or Alt key, that sets the keyboard in a
special mode of operation that is different from its base state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.64. mode name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mode name

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a name that a program
uses to request a specific set of network properties of a session the program
wants to use for a conversation. These properties include, for example, the
highest synchronization level for conversations on the sessions, the class of
service for the sessions, and the session routing and delay characteristics.
See also class of service (COS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.65. model profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

model profile

In Communications Manager, a supplied configuration profile with preconfigured
options intended for use in the creation of a new profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.66. modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

modem

A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog signal that
can be transmitted on a telecommunication line and that converts the received
analog signal to digital data for the computer. Synonymous with
modulator/demodulator. Contrast with digital data service adapter (DDSA). See
also data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.67. modified data tag (MDT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

modified data tag (MDT)

An indicator, associated with each input or output field in a displayed record,
that is automatically set ON when data is typed in the field. The modified data
tag is maintained by the display device and can be used by the program using
the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.68. modulator/demodulator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

modulator/demodulator

Synonym for modem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.69. module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

module

A discrete programming unit that usually performs a specific task or set of
tasks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.70. module definition file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

module definition file

A file used at link-edit time that describes the attributes for the executable
file being built (for example, load-on-call or preload attributes for
segments).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.71. module enabler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

module enabler

A component responsible for loading and configuring the original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) port connection managers (PCMs) by providing the binding
between the OEM PCMs and connection manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.72. monitor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

monitor

 1. In the base operating system, a routine that examines input to a character
    device driver and can delete, modify, or expand the character before
    passing it back to the device driver.

 2. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the function required to initiate the
    transmission of a token on the ring and to provide soft-error recovery in
    case of lost tokens, circulating frames, or other difficulties.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.73. more-data bit (M-bit) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

more-data bit (M-bit)

A bit in a data packet header that indicates that the following packet contains
logically related data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.74. mouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mouse

A device used to move a pointer on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.75. move window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

move window

An action that allows the user to reposition a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.76. MS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MS

Management services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.77. MSAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MSAP

MAC service access point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.78. MSDU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MSDU

MAC service data unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.79. MSFP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MSFP

Management services focal point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.80. MU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MU

Message unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.81. multilingual code page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multilingual code page

The code page that contains the alphanumeric and special symbols used in most
European, North American, and South American countries. In the base operating
system, this is code page 850.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.82. multiple-choice selection field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multiple-choice selection field

A type of selection field that allows users to select any number of items.
Contrast with single-choice selection field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.83. multiple-domain network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multiple-domain network

 1. A network with more than one system services control point.

 2. An Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network with more than one
    network node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.84. multiple thread support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multiple thread support

Support for processing requests for more than one session concurrently.
Pertaining to concurrent operation of more than one path of execution within a
computer. See thread.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.85. multiple virtual DOS machines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multiple virtual DOS machines

The concurrent operation of two or more virtual DOS machines. An OS/2 operating
system service coordinates the concurrent operation of separate virtual DOS
machines. See virtual DOS machine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.86. Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS)

 1. Implies MVS/370, the MVS/XA* product.

 2. The IBM operating system, consisting of MVS/System Product Version 1 and
    the MVS/370 Data Facility product, operating on a System/370 processor.
See Multiple Virtual Storage/Extended Architecture (MVS/XA).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.87. Multiple Virtual Storage/Extended Architecture (MVS/XA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multiple Virtual Storage/Extended Architecture (MVS/XA)*

(MVS/XA)

The IBM operating system, consisting of MVS/System Product Version 2 and the
MVS/XA Data Facility Product, operating on a System/370 processor in the
System/370 extended architecture mode. MVS/XA allows virtual storage addressing
to 2 gigabytes. See also Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.88. multipoint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multipoint

In data communications, pertaining to a network that allows two or more
stations to communicate with a single system on one line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.89. multipoint line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multipoint line

A line or circuit connecting several stations. Contrast with point-to-point
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.90. multiprogramming ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multiprogramming

A mode of operation that provides for interleaved execution of two or more
computer programs by a single processor. (I) (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.91. multistation access unit (MAU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multistation access unit (MAU)

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a wiring concentrator that can connect up to
eight lobes to a ring network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.92. multitasking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

multitasking

 1. A mode of operation that provides for concurrent performance or interleaved
    execution of two or more tasks. (I) (A)

 2. Pertaining to the concurrent execution of two or more tasks by a computer.

 3. Multiprogramming that provides for the concurrent performance, or
    interleaved execution, of two or more tasks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.93. MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MVS

Multiple Virtual Storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.94. MVS/XA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MVS/XA

Multiple Virtual Storage/Extended Architecture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. N (national language code page - Numlock) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o national language code page
o NAU
o navigation
o NCP
o NDIS
o negative response
o negotiable BIND
o negotiable link station
o negotiation
o nest
o NETBIOS
o NETID
o netname
o NetView
o NetView/PC
o network
o network accessible unit (NAU)
o network adapter address
o network adapter driver
o network address
o network addressable unit
o network administrator
o network application
o network basic input/output system (NETBIOS)
o network configuration tables
o Network Control Program (NCP)
o network directory database
o network driver interface specification (NDIS)
o network identifier (NETID)
o network information file (NIF)
o network management
o network management services function
o network management vector transport (NMVT)
o network name
o network node
o network-node control point (NNCP)
o network-node domain
o network node server
o network printer
o Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA)
o network-qualified name
o network service access point (NSAP)
o network services
o network services procedure error (NSPE)
o network topology database
o network user address (NUA)
o neutral color
o NIF
o NMVT
o NNCP
o no carrier
o node
o node address
o node directory
o node type
o nonescaping key
o noninteractive program
o nonretained data
o nonswitched line
o no parity
o normal priority process
o normal stop
o normal termination
o notification message
o NPDA
o NSAP
o NSPE
o NUA
o null
o nullable
o null character
o null suppression
o numbered frames
o number selection
o numeric constant
o NumLock


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. national language code page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

national language code page

A code page that contains the alphanumeric and special symbols used in a
particular language.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. NAU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NAU

 1. Network accessible unit.

 2. Network addressable unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.3. navigation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

navigation

The process of moving through windows and menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.4. NCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NCP

Network Control Program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.5. NDIS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NDIS

Network driver interface specification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.6. negative response ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

negative response

In SNA, a response indicating that a request did not arrive successfully or was
not processed successfully by the receiver. Contrast with positive response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.7. negotiable BIND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

negotiable BIND

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a request unit (RU) that can enable two
LU-LU half-sessions to negotiate the parameters of a session when the LUs are
activating the session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.8. negotiable link station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

negotiable link station

The capability of a link station to assume either a primary link-station or a
secondary link-station role and to negotiate with a partner link station during
link activation which role it will assume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.9. negotiation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

negotiation

 1. In X.25 communications, the process by which the sending data terminal
    equipment (DTE) and the receiving DTE establish the packet size, packet
    window size, and throughput class to be used during a call procedure.
    Contrast with validation.

 2. The process of deciding which packet size to transmit between a network and
    a 3710 Network Controller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.10. nest ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

nest

To incorporate a structure or structures into a structure of the same kind. For
example, to nest one loop (the nested loop) within another loop (the nesting
loop) or to nest one subroutine (the nested subroutine) within another
subroutine (nesting subroutine).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.11. NETBIOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NETBIOS

Network basic input/output system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.12. NETID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NETID

Network identifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.13. netname ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

netname

The name used in conjunction with the server name to identify a resource on the
network when it is shared.  See universal naming convention (UNC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.14. NetView ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetView*

A System/370-based IBM licensed program used to monitor a network, manage it,
and diagnose its problems.  See NetView/PC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.15. NetView/PC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetView/PC

A PC-based IBM licensed program through which application programs can be used
to monitor, manage, and diagnose problems in IBM Token-Ring networks, non-SNA
communication devices, and voice networks. See NetView.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.16. network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network

 1. A configuration of data processing devices and software connected for
    information interchange.

 2. A group of nodes and the links interconnecting them.  See APPN network,
    connection network, SNA network, subarea network, transport network, type
    2.1 (T2.1) intermediate routing network, and type 2.1 (T2.1) network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.17. network accessible unit (NAU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network accessible unit (NAU)

A logical unit (LU), physical unit (PU), control point (CP), or system services
control point (SSCP).  It is the origin or the destination of information
transmitted by the path control network.  Synonymous with network addressable
unit. See also network name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.18. network adapter address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network adapter address

The address of the MAC service access point (MSAP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.19. network adapter driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network adapter driver

In a local area network (LAN), software containing the protocol that governs
communication on the transport medium without concern for the physical
characteristics of the medium, but taking into account topology aspects of the
network. The software enables the exchange of a database by data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.20. network address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network address

An address consisting of subarea and element fields that identifies a link, a
link station, or a network accessible unit.  Subarea nodes use network
addresses; peripheral nodes use local addresses.  The boundary function in the
subarea node where a peripheral node is attached pairs local addresses with
network addresses and network addresses with local addresses. This function
also transforms local addresses to network addresses and network addresses to
local addresses.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.21. network addressable unit (NAU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network addressable unit (NAU)

Synonym for network accessible unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.22. network administrator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network administrator

The person responsible for the installation, management, control, and
configuration of a network. The network administrator defines the resources to
be shared, user access to the shared resources, and the type of access those
users can have.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.23. network application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network application

 1. A network program, or combination of a program and data, that performs a
    task.

 2. The use to which a network is put, such as data collection or
    inquiry/update.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.24. network basic input/output system (NetBIOS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network basic input/output system (NetBIOS)

 1. An application programming interface (API) between a local area network
    (LAN) adapter and the programs it supports.  NetBIOS is a part of LAN
    Adapter and Protocol Support.

 2. A system that provides a programming interface to the LAN so that an
    application program can have LAN communication without the knowledge and
    responsibility of some of the lower layer protocol functions.  Nodes are
    identified on the LAN by NetBIOS names and two types of data transfer are
    supported.  Session support provides guaranteed delivery of the data, while
    datagram support does not guarantee delivery.  NetBIOS is a part of LAN
    Adapter and Protocol Support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.25. network configuration tables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network configuration tables

In ACF/TCAM and ACF/VTAM, the tables through which the system services control
point (SSCP) interprets the network configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.26. Network Control Program (NCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Network Control Program (NCP)

An IBM-licensed program that provides communications controller support for
single-domain, multiple-domain, and interconnected network capability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.27. network directory database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network directory database

Synonym for distributed directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.28. network driver interface specification (NDIS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network driver interface specification (NDIS)

 1. A standardized method for communication between network adapters and
    protocol stacks.  NDIS provides a predefined way for writing drivers for
    network adapters and communication protocols.

 2. An application programming interface (API) definition that allows DOS or
    OS/2 systems to support one or more network adapters and protocol stacks.
    NDIS is a 16-bit, Ring O (for OS/2) API that defines a standardized way for
    writing drivers between layers 1 and 2 of the OSI model.  NDIS also handles
    the configuration and binding of these network drivers to multiple protocol
    stacks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.29. network identifier (NETID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network identifier (NETID)

A 1- to 8-byte customer-selected name or an 8-byte registered name that
uniquely identifies a specific subnetwork.  See also registered network ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.30. network information file (NIF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network information file (NIF)

A unique file associated with each network adapter driver on a workstation.
This NIF file provides information about the network adapter card and its
associated parameters, including default information, range values, and help
text.  The LAN Adapter and Protocol Support configuration uses these files to
dynamically build the configuration windows and to verify the values that the
user enters on these windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.31. network management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network management

 1. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the conceptual control element of a data
    station that interfaces with all of the layers of that data station and is
    responsible for setting and resetting control parameters, obtaining reports
    of error conditions, and determining if the station should be connected to
    or disconnected from the medium.

 2. The process of planning, organizing, and controlling a
    communications-oriented system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.32. network management services function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network management services function

A set of programs that manage a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.33. network management vector transport (NMVT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network management vector transport (NMVT)

The format used for Communications & System Management (C & SM) data, such as
alerts and link statistics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.34. network name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network name

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a symbolic name by which end users refer
to a network accessible unit (NAU), a link station, or a link. See also network
accessible unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.35. network node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network node

 1. A node of an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network that provides
    network services to end nodes and pre-APPN migration nodes.

 2. Synonym for APPN network node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.36. network-node control point (NNCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network-node control point (NNCP)

A component of a network node that manages resources of that node and can
provide services of other nodes in that network. See control point (CP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.37. network-node domain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network-node domain

An Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network-node control point, its
attached links, the network resources it answers directory search requests for
(namely, its local LUs and adjacent LEN end nodes), the adjacent APPN end nodes
it exchanges directory search requests and replies with, and other resources
(such as a local storage device) associated with its own node or an adjacent
end node it provides management services for.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.38. network node server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network node server

An Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network node that provides network
services for its local logical units (LUs) and adjacent end nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.39. network printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network printer

A printer that is recognized by the host even after a session for that printer
is no longer active.  A job to be printed can be sent to the spooler of a
network printer and it will be printed when the session is activated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.40. Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA)

An IBM licensed program that helps the user identify network problems from a
central control point using interactive display techniques.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.41. network-qualified name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network-qualified name

A 1- to 17-byte name consisting of an optional 1- to 8-byte network identifier
qualifier with a period concatenated to a 1- to 8-byte name.  (When the
qualifier is not present, the period is omitted.) See also qualifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.42. network service access point (NSAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network service access point (NSAP)

A type of calling party subaddress. Preferred binary encoding as defined in
X.213/IDO 8348 AD2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.43. network services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network services

 1. The services within network accessible units that control network operation
    through SSCP-SSCP, SSCP-PU, SSCP-LU and CP-CP sessions.

 2. The session services (directory and route-selection functions) and
    management services provided by an APPN network-node control point to its
    domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.44. network services procedure error (NSPE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network services procedure error (NSPE)

A request unit that is sent by a system services control point (SSCP) to a
logical unit (LU) when a procedure requested by that LU has failed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.45. network topology database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network topology database

The representation of the current topology of the intermediate routing portion
of the Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network.  The network topology
database contains entries for network nodes and the transmission groups (TGs)
interconnecting them.  Each entry describes the current characteristics of the
node or TG that it represents.

The network topology database is replicated at every APPN network node.  It is
dynamically maintained through the use of topology database updates (TDUs).
Whenever a new resource is introduced, or whenever the characteristics of an
old resource change, a TDU that describes the current characteristics of the
resource is generated and propagated to all network nodes.

The network topology database is used by network node route-selection services
to determine the preferred session route between two end point nodes for a
given class of service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.46. network user address (NUA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network user address (NUA)

Up to 15 decimal digits that serve to identify data terminal equipment (DTE).
The first four digits (digits 0 to 3) of an NUA are known as the data network
identification code (DNIC); they identify the country and the service within
the country. Digits 4 to 12 indicate the national number. The final two digits
may be used for a subaddress.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.47. neutral color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

neutral color

The appearance of white on a display or black on a printout.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.48. NIF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NIF

Network information file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.49. NMVT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NMVT

Network management vector transport


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.50. NNCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NNCP

Network-node control point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.51. no carrier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

no carrier

On broadband networks, a condition in which a carrier signal is not being
broadcast on a given frequency. In the absence of such a carrier, no
information can be modulated on that frequency.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.52. node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

node

An end point of a communications link or a junction common to two or more links
in a network.  Nodes can be processors, communication controllers, cluster
controllers, terminals, or workstations.  Nodes can vary in routing and other
functional capabilities.  See APPN end node, APPN network node, boundary node
(BN), LEN end node, peripheral node, and subarea node (SN).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.53. node address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

node address

The address of a node in a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.54. node directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

node directory

The directory containing the entries for all nodes referenced in the database
directories on its particular node.  The information in this directory is used
for all communication network connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.55. node type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

node type

A designation of a node according to the protocols it supports and the network
accessible units (NAUs) that it can contain.  Five types are defined:  1, 2.0,
2.1, 4, and 5.  Type 1, type 2.0, and type 2.1 nodes are peripheral nodes; type
4 and type 5 nodes are subarea nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.56. nonescaping key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

nonescaping key

In the SBCS environment, a key that allows a character to be typed without the
print position being changed.  Synonymous with dead key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.57. noninteractive program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

noninteractive program

An active program that is running but cannot receive input from the keyboard or
other interactive input device.  Contrast with interactive program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.58. nonretained data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

nonretained data

The graphics primitives that are not remembered by Presentation Interface once
they have been drawn.  Contrast with retained data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.59. nonswitched line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

nonswitched line

A connection between computers or devices using telephone switching equipment
that does not have to be established by dialing. Contrast with switched line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.60. no parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

no parity

A data transmission attribute in which the sender and receiver agree that no
parity bit is transmitted in the character frame. Contrast with parity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.61. normal priority process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

normal priority process

A process for which a designated time slice is sufficient for the process to be
completed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.62. normal stop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

normal stop

In Communications Manager, to stop communications after current functions (for
example, file transfer) have completed. Contrast with abnormal stop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.63. normal termination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

normal termination

The state of a program that has ended successfully. Contrast with abnormal
termination.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.64. notification message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

notification message

 1. A message that describes a condition for which a program requires a reply
    from its caller, or else a default reply will be sent to the program.

 2. A type of message that describes the status of the user's work or some
    state of the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.65. NPDA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NPDA

Network Problem Determination Application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.66. NSAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NSAP

Network service access point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.67. NSPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NSPE

Network services procedure error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.68. NUA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NUA

Network user address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.69. null ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

null

A special value that indicates the absence of information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.70. nullable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

nullable

Pertaining to the condition where a value for a field can have an absence of a
value.  For example, a field for a person's middle initial does not require a
value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.71. null character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

null character

The character, X'00', used to represent the absence of a printed or displayed
character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.72. null suppression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

null suppression

The bypassing of all null characters in order to reduce the amount of data to
be transmitted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.73. numbered frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

numbered frames

The information segments that are arranged in numbered order for
accountability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.74. number selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

number selection

A fast path selection method for a host menu where users type the number that
precedes the choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.75. numeric constant ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

numeric constant

A fixed value that is a number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.76. NumLock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NumLock

A typing mode resulting from pressing the Numlock key that causes the keys on
the dual-purpose numeric keypad on the keyboard to produce numbers when pressed
rather than their base values.  The keyboard remains in NumLock mode until the
user presses the NumLock key a second time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. O (OAF - overflow) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o OAF
o object code
o object file
o object module
o observer terminal
o octet
o ODAI
o odd parity
o OEM
o offset
o OIA
o OLU
o one-byte checksum error detection
o one-way bracket
o one-way conversation
o online
o online information
o open
o open file
o open systems interconnection (OSI)
o operand
o operating system
o operation
o operational diskette
o operator
o operator information area (OIA)
o optimization
o option
o origin address field (OAF)
o origin address field prime (OAF')
o original equipment manufacturer (OEM)
o originator
o Origin-Destination Assignor indicator (ODAI)
o origin logical unit (OLU)
o OS/2
o OS/2 file system
o OS/2 screen group
o OSI
o outgoing call
o outgoing call directory table
o output area
o output device
o overflow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.1. OAF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OAF

Origin address field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.2. object code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object code

The output from a compiler or assembler, which is itself executable machine
code or is suitable for processing to produce executable machine code. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.3. object file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object file

The machine-level program produced as the output of an assembly or a compiled
operation. Synonymous with object module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.4. object module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object module

Synonym for object file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.5. observer terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

observer terminal

In problem determination for the IBM Token-Ring Network, the device used to run
the ring diagnostic program or a network application program that is capable of
providing ring status information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.6. octet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

octet

A byte composed of eight binary elements. Synonymous with eight-bit byte. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.7. ODAI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ODAI

Origin-destination assignor indicator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.8. odd parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

odd parity

A data transmission attribute in which the parity bit of a character frameis
set so that the sum of the digits in the character with the parity bit is odd.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.9. OEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OEM

Original equipment manufacturer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.10. offset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

offset

The number of measuring units from an arbitrary starting point in a record,
area, control block, or a segment to some other point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.11. OIA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OIA

Operator information area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.12. OLU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OLU

Origin logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.13. one-byte checksum error detection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

one-byte checksum error detection

The sum of a group of data items associated with the group for checking
purposes. The data items are either numerals or other character strings
regarded as numerals during the process of a checksum.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.14. one-way bracket ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

one-way bracket

A bracket in which data is sent from one network accessible unit (NAU) to
another in a single chain with begin bracket, conditional end bracket, and
exception response requested.  When one-way brackets are used on control point
to control point (CP-CP) sessions, they are always sent on the
contention-winner session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.15. one-way conversation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

one-way conversation

A conversation in which data is sent from one transaction program (TP) (the
source) to another (the target) with no response requested and the conversation
is released after the data is sent.  If the source TP terminates as soon as it
releases the conversation, the data may still be in transit; thus, the source
and target TPs are not necessarily active at the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.16. online ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

online

 1. Pertaining to a user's ability to interact with a computer. (A)

 2. A description of a user's access to a computer by way of a screen.

 3. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the
    continuous control of a computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.17. online information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

online information

The information stored in a computer system that can be displayed, used, and
modified in an interactive manner without any need to obtain printed copy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.18. open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

open

The function that connects a file, adapter, system resource, or database object
to a program for processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.19. open file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

open file

The status of a file when its contents are being accessed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.20. open systems interconnection (OSI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

open systems interconnection (OSI)

 1. The interconnection of open systems in accordance with standards of the
    International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for the exchange of
    information.  (T) (A)

 2. The use of standardized procedures to enable the interconnection of data
    processing systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.21. operand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

operand

 1. An entity on which an operation is performed.  (A)

 2. Information entered with a command name to define the data a command
    processor operates on and to control the execution of the command
    processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.22. operating system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

operating system

The software that controls the running of programs. An operating system may
provide services such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output (I/O)
control, and data management. See IBM Operating System/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.23. operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

operation

 1. A well-defined action that, when applied to any permissible combination of
    known entities, produces a new entity; for example, the process of
    addition.

 2. A program step performed by a computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.24. operational diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

operational diskette

Synonym for working diskette .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.25. operator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

operator

A symbol that represents an operation to be performed; for example, the plus
sign (+).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.26. operator information area (OIA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

operator information area (OIA)

In 3270 and 5250 emulation, the bottom line of the screen where status about
the emulation session is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.27. optimization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

optimization

The determination of an efficient access strategy for satisfying a database
access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.28. option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

option

 1. A specification in a statement or command that can be used to influence the
    execution of the statement.

 2. A selectable item on a menu bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.29. origin address field (OAF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

origin address field (OAF)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a field in an FID2 transmission header
that contains the address of the originating network accessible unit (NAU).
Contrast with destination address field (DAF). See also origin address field
prime (OAF').


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.30. origin address field prime (OAF') ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

origin address field prime (OAF')

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a field in an FID2 transmission header
that contains the local address of the originating NAU. See also origin address
field (OAF).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.31. original equipment manufacturer (OEM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

original equipment manufacturer (OEM)

A manufacturer of equipment that may be marketed by another manufacturer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.32. originator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

originator

In Communications Manager, a component or user application reporting an error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.33. Origin-Destination Assignor indicator (ODAI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Origin-Destination Assignor indicator (ODAI)

A bit in an FID2 transmission header used to divide the address space so that
an address space manager (ASM) in one node may use all possible combinations of
OAF, DAF with the ODAI having one setting, and the ASM in the adjacent node may
use all possible combinations of OAF, DAF with the ODAI having the
complementary setting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.34. origin logical unit (OLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

origin logical unit (OLU)

The logical unit from which data is sent. Contrast with destination logical
unit. See also initiating logical unit (ILU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.35. OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2

See IBM Operating System/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.36. OS/2 file system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 file system

A file system provided by the base operating system and accessible through the
OS/2 file input/output (I/O) functions. A file system is restricted to a single
medium, either an entire diskette or a single partition of one fixed disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.37. OS/2 screen group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 screen group

See screen group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.38. OSI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OSI

Open systems interconnection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.39. outgoing call ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

outgoing call

A call being made to another data terminal equipment (DTE). Contrast with
incoming call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.40. outgoing call directory table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

outgoing call directory table

The table configured through connection manager that contains definitions
identifying incoming calls that can be accepted by a workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.41. output area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

output area

The area of paper within which the picture is to be printed or plotted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.42. output device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

output device

A device such as a printer or screen in a data processing system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.43. overflow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

overflow

A point reached when the memory capacity of a computer is filled with more data
than the computer can store or when the value of a data object exceeds its
range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. P (pacing - PVC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o pacing
o pacing character
o pacing group
o pacing interval
o pacing response
o pacing window
o pacing window size
o packet
o packet level
o packet-level DCE
o packet switching
o packet switching data network (PSDN)
o packet window
o page
o page footing
o page heading
o page mode
o paint
o palette
o panel
o panel body area
o panel title
o parallel device
o parallel device port
o parallel device queue
o parallel-in, serial-out
o parallel port
o parallel sessions
o parallel TGs
o parameter
o parent directory
o parent process
o parent window
o parity
o parity type
o parse
o partition
o partner logical unit (PLU)
o partner transaction program
o Pascal/2
o password
o Paste
o patch cable
o path
o path control (PC)
o path control layer
o path control network
o path information unit (PIU)
o path trace
o PBX
o PC
o PC-DOS
o PC I/O channel
o PCM
o PC Network
o peer services
o peer-to-peer
o pel
o performance problem
o peripheral LU
o peripheral node
o permanent virtual circuit (PVC)
o persistent verification
o personal computer input/output (PC I/O) channel
o physical device
o physical level
o physical unit (PU)
o physical unit control point (PUCP)
o physical unit type
o PIC
o pick
o picture element
o piggyback
o PIP
o pipe
o PIU
o pixel
o placeholder
o playback sequence
o plotter
o PLU
o PMR number
o PNA
o pointer
o pointing device
o pointings
o point-to-point
o point-to-point line
o poll
o polling
o polling list
o pop
o port
o port connection manager (PCM)
o positional parameter
o positive response
o post
o POST
o Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration (PTT)
o power-on self test (POST)
o preempt
o prenegotiation phase
o Presentation Interface
o Presentation Manager
o presentation services layer
o presentation space
o presentation space ID (PSID)
o PRF
o primary code page
o primary half-session
o primary link station
o primary logical unit (PLU)
o primary partition
o primary system
o primitives
o printer port
o printer queue
o print job
o print queue
o print spooler
o priority
o privacy
o private application
o private branch exchange (PBX)
o privilege level
o probe
o probe ID
o probe trip
o problem determination aids
o problem isolation chart (PIC)
o problem management focal point
o Problem Management Record (PMR) number
o Problem Report Form (PRF)
o PROC
o procedure (PROC)
o procedure language
o procedure language statements
o Procedures Language/2 REXX
o procedure variable
o process
o process ID
o process lidentification number (process ID)
o processor
o Professional Office System (PROFS)
o profile
o PROFS
o program block
o program details
o program group
o program initialization parameter (PIP)
o Programmable Network Access (PNA)
o programmed operator
o programmed symbols
o program name
o program title
o program updates
o prompt
o prompted interface
o proportionally spaced font
o protected field
o protect mode
o protect-mode application
o protocol
o protocol boundary
o protocol converter
o protocol discriminator
o protocol handler
o PROTOCOL.INI
o PSDN
o PSID
o PTT
o PU
o public application
o PUCP
o pull-down
o push
o push button
o PU type
o PVC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1. pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing

 1. In data communications, a technique by which receiving equipment controls
    the transmission of data by sending equipment to prevent overrun. See also
    flow control. See receive pacing and send pacing.

 2. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a technique by which a receiving
    component controls the rate of transmission of a sending component to
    prevent overrun or congestion. See receive pacing and send pacing. See also
    flow control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2. pacing character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing character

An indicator that signals that the receiving component is ready to accept
additional data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3. pacing group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing group

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the path information units (PIUs)
    that can be transmitted on a virtual route before a virtual-route pacing
    response is received, indicating that the virtual route receiver is ready
    to receive more PIUs on the route.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4. pacing interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing interval

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the duration between requests that
    can be transmitted on the normal flow in one direction on a session before
    a session-level pacing response is received, indicating that the receiver
    is ready to accept the next group of requests.

 2. In asynchronous communications, the duration enforced by the sender between
    successive lines of data.

 3. The requests that can be transmitted on the normal flow in one direction on
    a session before a session-level pacing response is received, indicating
    that the receiver is ready to accept the next group of requests.

 4. Synonymous with pacing window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5. pacing response ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing response

An indicator that signifies the readiness of a receiving component to accept
another pacing group; the indicator is carried in a response header (RH) for
session-level pacing and in a transmission header (TH) for virtual-route
pacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6. pacing window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing window

The requests that can be transmitted on the normal flow in one direction on a
session before a session-level pacing response is received, indicating that the
receiver is ready to accept the next group of requests. Synonym for pacing
interval.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7. pacing window size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pacing window size

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the number of request units (RUs) that a
program can send before getting permission to send more.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8. packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

packet

A group of data and control characters, transferred as a unit, determined by
the process of transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.9. packet level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

packet level

A part of CCITT Recommendation X.25 that defines the protocol for establishing
logical connections between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE), and for transferring data on these
connections. Communications Manager functions as a DTE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.10. packet-level DCE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

packet-level DCE

In a packet switching data network, the equipment at the exchange that manages
the network connection side of the protocol at the packet (or network) level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.11. packet switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

packet switching

The process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so
that a channel is occupied only during transmission of a packet. On completion
of the transmission, the channel is made available for transfer of other
packets. (I)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.12. packet switching data network (PSDN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

packet switching data network (PSDN)

A communications network that uses packet switching as a means of transmitting
data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.13. packet window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

packet window

A specified number of packets that can be sent by the data terminal equipment
(DTE) device before it receives an acknowledgment from the receiving station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.14. page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

page

In a virtual storage system, a fixed-length block that has a virtual address
and is transferred as a unit between memory and disk storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.15. page footing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

page footing

Words located at the bottom of a text area of each page of a report.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.16. page heading ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

page heading

Words located at the top of a text area of each page of a report.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.17. page mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

page mode

The mode of operation in which the 3800 Printing Subsystem can accept a page of
data from a host processor to be printed on an all-points-addressable output
medium.  Printed data can consist of pages composed of text, images, overlays,
and page segments. Contrast with compatibility mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.18. paint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

paint

In Presentation Interface, the action of drawing or redrawing the contents of a
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.19. palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

palette

A list of colors assigned to window elements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.20. panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

panel

Deprecated term for window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.21. panel body area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

panel body area

Deprecated term for client area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.22. panel title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

panel title

Deprecated term for window title.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.23. parallel device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel device

A device that allows concurrent or simultaneous operation of two or more
devices or concurrent performance of two or more activities in a single device.
Contrast with serial device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.24. parallel device port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel device port

See parallel port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.25. parallel device queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel device queue

A line or list that synchronizes the transfer of data between the computer
program and the parallel device, thereby minimizing delays for input/output
(I/O) operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.26. parallel-in, serial-out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel-in, serial-out

A method of sending data by way of the universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART). See also universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.27. parallel port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel port

On a personal computer, a port used to attach devices such as dot matrix
printers and input/output (I/O) units; it transmits data 1 byte at a time.
Contrast with serial port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.28. parallel sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel sessions

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), two or more concurrently active sessions
between the same two logical units (LUs). Each session can have different
session parameters.  Contrast with single session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.29. parallel transmission groups (TGs) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parallel transmission groups (TGs)

The multiple transmission groups (TGs) connecting two adjacent nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.30. parameter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parameter

 1. The information supplied by a program or user to a command or function.

 2. The data passed between programs or procedures.

 3. A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and
    that may denote the application. (I) (A)

 4. An item either the operator specifies a value for or the system provides a
    value for.

 5. A name in a procedure that is used to refer to an argument passed to that
    procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.31. parent directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent directory

The directory one level above the current directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.32. parent process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent process

A process that creates other processes. Contrast with child process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.33. parent window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent window

A window that has one or more child windows positioned relative to it. Contrast
with child window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.34. parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parity

The determination that the number of ones (or zeros) in an array of binary
digits is either odd or even. Contrast with no parity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.35. parity bit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parity bit

A binary digit appended to a group of binary digits to make the sum of all the
digits, including the appended binary digit, either odd or even, or null or
mark, as preestablished. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.36. parity type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parity type

See even parity, mark parity, no parity, odd parity, and space parity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.37. parse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parse

In systems with time sharing, to analyze the operands entered with a command
and create a parameter list for the command processor from the information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.38. partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

partition

An area of storage on a fixed disk that contains a particular operating system
or logical drives where data and programs can be stored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.39. partner logical unit (PLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

partner logical unit (PLU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the remote participant in a session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.40. partner transaction program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

partner transaction program

 1. The transaction program engaged in an APPC conversation with a local
    transaction program.

 2. An advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) transaction program
    located at the remote partner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.41. Pascal/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pascal/2

See IBM Pascal/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.42. password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

password

 1. A unique string of characters that a program, computer operator, or user
    must supply to meet security requirements before gaining access to data.

 2. A code or signal, usually confidential, that enables the user of a
    workstation to have full or limited access to the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.43. Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Paste

A Presentation Manager function that copies the contents of the clipboard and
inserts it at the current cursor position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.44. patch cable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

patch cable

A cable with IBM Cabling System connectors at each end, used to connect
components, devices, and cables of the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.45. path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path

 1. The route used to locate files on a disk or diskette.  The route consists
    of a collection of drives and directories.

 2. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a route between any two nodes.

 3. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the set of data links, data link
    control layers, and path control layers that a path information unit
    travels through when sent from transmission control of one half-session to
    transmission control of another half-session. Synonymous with absolute path
    name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.46. path control (PC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path control (PC)

The function that routes message units between network accessible units in the
network and provides the paths between them.  PC converts the basic information
units (BIUs) from transmission control (possibly segmenting them) into path
information units (PIUs) and exchanges basic transmission units containing one
or more PIUs with data link control. Path control differs by node type:  some
nodes (for example, T2.0 and T2.1) use local addresses or session identifiers
for routing, and others (subarea nodes) use network addresses for routing.  See
also link peripheral node and subarea node (SN).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.47. path control layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path control layer

The layer that routes all messages to data links and half-sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.48. path control network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path control network

The routing portion of a Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network. The part
of the SNA network that includes the data link control (DLC) and path control
layers. Synonymous with transport network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.49. path information unit (PIU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path information unit (PIU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a message unit consisting of a
transmission header (TH) alone, or a TH followed by a basic information unit
(BIU) or a BIU segment. See also transmission header (TH).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.50. path trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path trace

A function that may be requested of a bridge by a received frame.  The request
is for a record of the bridges through which the frame has passed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.51. PBX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PBX

Private branch exchange.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.52. PC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PC

Path control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.53. PC-DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PC-DOS

A disk operating system based on MS-DOS** that operates with all IBM personal
computers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.54. PC I/O channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PC I/O channel

Personal computer input/output (PC I/O) channel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.55. PCM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PCM

Port connection manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.56. PC Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PC Network

See IBM PC Network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.57. peer services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

peer services

In the IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor device driver application
programming interface, all of the bus master services available through the IBM
Realtime Interface Co-Processor Portmaster Adapter/A. These services transfer
device driver functions, such as the PeerClose function, between applications
running on the base operating system and applications running on the IBM
Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.58. peer-to-peer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

peer-to-peer

The communication between two Systems Network Architecture (SNA) logical units
(LUs) that is not managed by a host, commonly used when referring to LU 6.2
nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.59. pel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pel

Synonym for pixel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.60. performance problem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

performance problem

A situation in which unusually slow or delayed system execution or response
time causes programs to take longer than usual to complete a task.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.61. perpheral LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

peripheral LU

In SNA, a logical unit in a peripheral node. Contrast with subarea LU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.62. peripheral node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

peripheral node

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a node that has no intermediate
    routing function and is dependent upon an intermediate or host node to
    provide certain network services for its dependent logical units (LUs).
    See node.

 2. A node that uses local addresses for routing and therefore is not affected
    by changes in network addresses.  A peripheral node requires
    boundary-function assistance from an adjacent subarea node.  A peripheral
    node is a type 1, 2.0, or 2.1 node connected to a subarea node with
    boundary function within a subarea. See also path control (PC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.63. permanent virtual circuit (PVC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

permanent virtual circuit (PVC)

A virtual circuit that has a logical channel permanently assigned to it at each
data terminal equipment (DTE). A call establishment protocol is not required. A
permanent virtual circuit is the packet network equivalent of a leased line.
See switched virtual circuit (SVC) and virtual circuit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.64. persistent verification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

persistent verification

Allows for a single password verification to persist over multiple
conversations from user sign-on to sign-off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.65. personal computer input/output (PC I/O) channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

personal computer input/output (PC I/O) channel

In a computing system, a functional unit, controlled by a processor, that
handles transfer of data between processor storage and local peripheral
devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.66. physical device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical device

An input/output (I/O) device identified in a program by its actual label or
number. Contrast with logical device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.67. physical level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical level

A standard that defines the electrical, physical, functional, and procedural
methods used to control the physical link running between the data terminal
equipment (DTE) device and the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.68. physical unit (PU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical unit (PU)

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the component that manages and
    monitors the resources of a node, as requested by a system services control
    point (SSCP) using a system services control point-physical unit (SSCP-PU)
    session. Each node of an SNA network contains a physical unit.

 2. The component that manages and monitors the resources (such as attached
    links and adjacent link stations) associated with a node, as requested by
    an SSCP through an SSCP-PU session. An SSCP activates a session with the PU
    to indirectly manage, through the PU, resources of the node such as
    attached links.  This term applies to types 2.0, 4, and 5 nodes only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.69. physical unit control point (PUCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical unit control point (PUCP)

In Systems Network Architecture, a component that provides a subset of system
services control point (SSCP) functions for activating the physical unit (PU)
within its node and its local link resources. Each type 1, type 2, and type 4
node contains a PUCP; a type 5 node contains an SSCP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.70. physical unit type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical unit type

The classification of a physical unit according to the type of node in which it
resides. The physical unit type is the same as its node type; that is, a type 1
physical unit resides in a type 1 node, and so on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.71. PIC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PIC

Problem isolation chart.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.72. pick ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pick

To select part of a displayed object using a pointer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.73. picture element ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

picture element

Synonym for pixel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.74. piggyback ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

piggyback

A technique used to improve LAN performance by combining an acknowledgment for
received data with a request for more data, eliminating a frame from the
network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.75. PIP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PIP

Program initialization parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.76. pipe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pipe

To direct the data so that the output from one process becomes the input to
another process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.77. PIU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PIU

Path information unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.78. pixel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pixel

The smallest area of a display screen capable of being addressed and switched
between visible and invisible states. Synonymous with pel, display point, and
picture element. See also window coordinates.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.79. placeholder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

placeholder

A symbol that can assume any of a given set of values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.80. playback sequence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

playback sequence

A series of characters or function keys assigned to a single function key to be
used instead of typing the sequence each time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.81. plotter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

plotter

An output device that uses pens to draw on paper or transparencies.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.82. PLU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PLU

 1. Primary logical unit.

 2. Partner logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.83. PMR number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PMR number

Problem Management Record number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.84. PNA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PNA

Programmable Network Access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.85. pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pointer

 1. The symbol, usually in the shape of an arrow, that a user can move with a
    pointing device. Users place the pointer over objects they want to work
    with.

 2. A data element that indicates the location of another data element. (T)

 3. In the C language, a variable that holds the address of a data object or a
    function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.86. pointing device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pointing device

A device, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used to move a pointer on
the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.87. pointings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pointings

In graphics, the pairs of x-y coordinates produced by a user defining positions
on a screen with a pointing device such as a mouse.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.88. point-to-point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

point-to-point

Pertaining to data transmission between two locations without use of any
intermediate terminal or computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.89. point-to-point line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

point-to-point line

A communications line that connects a single remote station to a computer.
Contrast with multipoint line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.90. poll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

poll

To determine if any remote device on a communications line is ready to send
data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.91. polling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

polling

 1. The process whereby stations are invited, one at a time, to transmit.

 2. The process whereby a controlling station contacts the attached devices to
    avoid contention, to determine the status of operations, or to determine
    readiness to send or receive data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.92. polling list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

polling list

A list of addresses that the host system uses to control the polling of control
units or devices on a binary synchronous communications (BSC) or Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC) multipoint line. A general polling list contains the
addresses of the control units only; a specific polling list contains the
addresses of the devices, which include the addresses of the control units.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.93. pop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pop

To remove an item from a list or stack.  Contrast with push.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.94. port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

port

 1. Synonym for communication port.

 2. A connector on a device that cables for other devices, such as displays or
    printers, are attached to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.95. port connection manager (PCM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

port connection manager (PCM)

A program that manages the establishing and releasing of the relationship
between the logical link control (LLC) and the physical connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.96. positional parameter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

positional parameter

A parameter that must be positioned in a specified location relative to other
parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.97. positive response ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

positive response

A response indicating that a request arrived and was successfully received and
processed. Contrast with negative response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.98. post ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

post

 1. To note the occurrence of an event; for example, an operating system
    function informs an application when additional information is available.

 2. To affix to a usual place.

 3. In NetBIOS, to provide items such as a return code at the end of a command
    or function, or to define an appendage routine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.99. POST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

POST

Power-on self test.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.100. Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration (PTT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration (PTT)

A generic term for a government-operated, common carrier service in countries
other than the U.S. and Canada.  Examples of PTTs are the Bundespost in Germany
and the Nippon Telephone and Telegraph Public Corporation in Japan.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.101. power-on self test (POST) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

power-on self test (POST)

A series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically by a device each time
the power is turned on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.102. preempt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

preempt

To take control away from; for example, to interrupt the execution of a process
to allow another process to execute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.103. prenegotiation phase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

prenegotiation phase

An optional phase of link activation that occurs after physical connection of
the link has been established. See also connect phase and contact phase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.104. Presentation Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation Interface

An application programming interface (API) for Presentation Manager that allows
users to write graphics applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.105. Presentation Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation Manager

The interface of the OS/2 program that presents, in windows, a graphics-based
interface to applications and files installed and running on the OS/2 program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.106. presentation services layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

presentation services layer

In SNA, the layer that provides services for transaction programs, such as
controlling conversation-level communication between them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.107. presentation space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

presentation space

 1. The space that contains the device-independent definition of a picture.

 2. In Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface
    (EHLLAPI), an area in memory that corresponds to a screen image.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.108. presentation space ID (PSID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

presentation space ID (PSID)

Synonym for short name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.109. PRF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRF

Problem Report Form.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.110. primary code page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primary code page

 1. The code page that is active when the computer is started.

 2. The first code page listed in the CODEPAGE= statement in the CONFIG.SYS
    file. See code page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.111. primary half-session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primary half-session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the half-session on the node that sends
the session activation request. See half-session, primary logical unit (PLU),
and secondary half-session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.112. primary link station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primary link station

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the link station on a link responsible
for control of the link. Contrast with secondary link station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.113. primary logical unit (PLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primary logical unit (PLU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the logical unit (LU) that contains the
primary half-session for the LU-LU session that sent the bind. See secondary
logical unit (SLU). See also secondary half-session and primary half-session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.114. primary partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primary partition

The partition on a fixed disk that contains the operating system that is active
when the computer is started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.115. primary system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primary system

The system that controls the data link in a communications session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.116. primitives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

primitives

The link service access structures that allow call control information to be
passed between the service user and the service provider. The four types of
primitives are:

o Request
o Indication
o Response
o Confirm


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.117. printer port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

printer port

A connector on a printer that cables for other devices are attached to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.118. printer queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

printer queue

Synonym for spooler queue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.119. print job ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

print job

The result of sending a file to be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.120. print queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

print queue

A file containing a list of the names of files waiting to be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.121. print spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

print spooler

A program that allows output to be stored temporarily in files until it can be
printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.122. priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

priority

A rank assigned to a task that determines its precedence in receiving system
resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.123. privacy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

privacy

The right of individuals and organizations to control collection and use of
their data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.124. private application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

private application

An application maintained by an individual user and not available across a
network.  Contrast with public application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.125. private branch exchange (PBX) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

private branch exchange (PBX)

An automatic or manual private telephone exchange for transmission of calls to
and from a public telephone network.  If the exchange equipment contains an
integral computer, it is called a computerized branch exchange. See
computerized branch exchange (CBX).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.126. privilege level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

privilege level

 1. A protection mechanism of the processor that provides four hierarchical
    protection levels to ensure program reliability.  At any one time, a task
    executes at one of the four levels.  A task executing at one level cannot
    access data at a more privileged level, nor can it call a procedure at a
    less privileged level.  The most trusted service procedures occupy the
    higher levels (levels 0, 1, and 2) while the less trusted application
    programs are placed at the lowest level of privilege (level 3).

 2. A term used by the base operating system to indicate what level of
    resources a piece of code can access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.127. probe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

probe

A section of code that collects problem diagnosis information in the event of
an unexpected error condition.  This information is passed on to First Failure
Support Technology/2 (FFST/2). See also FFST/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.128. probe ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

probe ID

A 4-byte hexadecimal value that identifies a probe.  The unique probe IDs
within Communications Manager can be used to localize problems. For example,
the first three characters of the probe ID identify the Communications Manager
component where the error occurred. See probe.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.129. probe trip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

probe trip

The activation of a probe which is caused by an unexpected error condition. See
probe.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.130. problem determination aids ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

problem determination aids

A problem diagnosis facility in Communications Manager that provides trace and
dump services. See also dump services and trace services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.131. problem isolation chart (PIC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

problem isolation chart (PIC)

A diagnostic procedure for finding problems with a personal computer or its
options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.132. problem management focal point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

problem management focal point

An organization or designee that supplies management services that are
responsible for problem analysis and diagnosis for a sphere of control. An
alert focal point is a subset of a problem management focal point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.133. Problem Management Record (PMR) number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Problem Management Record (PMR) number

A number that can be provided by ServiceLine or an IBM Support Center
representative when a problem is reported by a service coordinator. Contrast
with APAR number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.134. Problem Report Form (PRF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Problem Report Form (PRF)

A form that can be used by service coordinators to record information about a
problem for the purposes of:

o Maintaining a history of problems and resolutions
o Determining status on a problem being investigated by IBM
o If applicable, sending information to IBM for analysis


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.135. PROC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROC

Procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.136. procedure (PROC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

procedure (PROC)

 1. The course of action taken for the solution of a problem.

 2. The description of the course of action taken for the solution of a
    problem. (A)

 3. A sequenced set of statements that can be used at one or more points in one
    or more computer programs, and that usually has one or more input
    parameters and yields one or more output parameters.

 4. The actions taken to implement protocols.

 5. A named collection of related statements, and possibly control statements,
    that perform a particular task.

 6. In a programming language, a block of code, with or without formal
    parameters, whose execution is invoked by means of a procedure call. (I)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.137. procedure language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

procedure language

See procedure language statements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.138. procedure language statements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

procedure language statements

The programming statements that are used in procedures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.139. Procedures Language/2 REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Procedures Language/2 REXX

A superset of the Systems Application Architecture (SAA) Procedures Language.
See also Restructured Extended Executor (REXX).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.140. procedure variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

procedure variable

A variable that can be used within procedures to control the flow of the
procedure or to allow for the substitution of variable values into
instructions.  These are created automatically when needed and do not persist
after the procedure ends.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.141. process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

process

 1. A systematic sequence of operations to produce a specified result.

 2. A unique, finite course of events defined by its purpose or by its effect,
    achieved under given conditions.

 3. An executing function, or a function that is waiting to be executed.

 4. To perform operations on data in a process. (I)

 5. A collection of system resources that include one or more threads of
    execution that perform a task.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.142. process ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

process ID


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.143. process identification number (process ID) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

process identification number (process ID)

A unique number assigned to a process by the operating system. The number is
used internally by processes to communicate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.144. processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

processor

In a computer, a functional unit that interprets and processes instructions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.145. Professional Office System (PROFS*) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Professional Office System (PROFS*)

A facility that allows users to receive, create, send, store, and search for
information within an office environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.146. profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

profile

 1. An object that contains information about the characteristics of a computer
    system or application.

 2. In Communications Manager, a part of a configuration file that defines
    parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.147. PROFS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROFS

Professional office system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.148. program block ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program block

In program-oriented languages, a computer program subdivision that serves to
group related statements, delimit routines, specify storage allocation,
delineate the applicability of labels, or segment parts of the computer program
for other purposes. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.149. program details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program details

The information about a program that is used when the program is started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.150. program group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program group

In Presentation Manager, a set of several programs that can be acted upon as a
single entity. For example, they can all be started together. See also folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.151. program initialization parameter (PIP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program initialization parameter (PIP)

An advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) parameter that is passed
to a transaction program when it is started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.152. Programmable Network Access (PNA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Programmable Network Access (PNA)

An IBM licensed communications application program used with OS/2 to enhance
communication between SNA and non-SNA communication systems and provide access
to distributed applications from multivendor networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.153. programmed operator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

programmed operator

The Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface (EHLLAPI)
application program that performs and monitors activities in a workstation
presentation space. Contrast with terminal operator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.154. programmed symbols ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

programmed symbols

The dot patterns loaded into the presentation space storage of an output
device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.155. program name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program name

The full file specification of a program. Contrast with program title.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.156. program title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program title

The name of a program as it is listed in the window list. Contrast with program
name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.157. program updates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

program updates

See Corrective Service diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.158. prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

prompt

 1. An action that users request while the cursor is in an entry field.

 2. A displayed message that requests input from the user or gives operational
    information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.159. prompted interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

prompted interface

An interface consisting of messages, menus, and windows that guides the user
through the steps necessary to perform a task.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.160. proportionally spaced font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

proportionally spaced font

A font with graphic characters contained in character cells varying with the
size of each graphic character.  This allows for even spacing between printed
characters, and eliminates excess white space around narrow characters, such as
the letter i. Contrast with fixed-space font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.161. protected field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protected field

A display field in which a user cannot add, modify, or delete data. Contrast
with unprotected field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.162. protect mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protect mode

In the OS/2 operating system, a method of program operation that limits or
prevents access to certain instructions or areas of storage. Contrast with real
mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.163. protect-mode application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protect-mode application

An application program that runs in an OS/2 screen group. Contrast with
real-mode application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.164. protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocol

 1. The set of rules governing the operation of functional units of a
    communication system that must be followed if communication is to take
    place.

 2. A specification for the format and relative timing of information exchanged
    between communicating parties.

 3. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the meanings of and the sequencing
    rules for requests and responses used for managing the network,
    transferring data, and synchronizing the states of network components.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.165. protocol boundary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocol boundary

The signals and rules governing interactions between two components within a
node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.166. protocol converter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocol converter

A device that allows terminals to communicate with host systems by converting
one data stream to another data stream; for example, ASCII data stream to IBM
3270 data stream.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.167. protocol discriminator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocol discriminator

A code that identifies the type of data sent from one user to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.168. protocol handler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocol handler

The programming in an adapter that encodes and decodes the protocol used to
send data over a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.169. PROTOCOL.INI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROTOCOL.INI

A file that shares configuration and binding information for all the protocol
and MAC modules in your system that use the network device interface
specification (NDIS) architecture.  NDIS support is provided by LAN Adapter and
Protocol Supports (LAPS).  The PROTOCOL.INI file contains the final
configuration for the network drivers. Driver-specific information in the
PROTOCOL.INI file is used during the configuration and initialization of the
network. This file also contains configuration information related to ISDN
protocols and ISDN adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.170. PSDN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSDN

packet-switching data network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.171. PSID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSID

Presentation space ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.172. PTT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PTT

Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.173. PU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PU

Physical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.174. public application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

public application

An application maintained by the network administrator and shared with users on
a network. Contrast with private application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.175. PUCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PUCP

Physical unit control point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.176. pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

pull-down

Deprecated term for menu list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.177. push ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

push

To add an item to a last-in-first-out (LIFO) list or stack. Contrast with pop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.178. push button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

push button

A rounded-corner rectangle with text inside used in graphics applications for
actions that occur when the push button is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.179. PU type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PU type

 1. A term used to identify the type of physical unit (PU) in a node.

 2. Deprecated as a synonym for node type; correctly used to identify the type
    of physical unit (PU) in a node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.180. PVC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PVC

Permanent virtual circuit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Q (Q-bit - quiesce) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o Q-bit
o QLLC
o qualified logical link control (QLLC)
o qualifier
o qualifier bit (Q-bit)
o queue
o queued attach
o quiesce


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.1. Q-bit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Q-bit

Qualifier-bit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.2. QLLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

QLLC

Qualified logical link control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.3. qualified logical link control (QLLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

qualified logical link control (QLLC)

A logical link control protocol that allows the transfer of data link control
information between two adjacent Systems Network Architecture (SNA) nodes that
are connected through an X.25-based packet-switching data network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.4. qualifier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

qualifier

 1. A modifier that makes a name unique.

 2. In a network-qualified name, a 1- to 8-byte network identifier followed by
    a period.
See also network-qualified name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.5. qualifier bit (Q-bit) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

qualifier bit (Q-bit)

A bit in a data packet header indicating the type of information contained in
the packet. A 1-bit indicates control information, and a 0-bit indicates data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.6. queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

queue

A line or list formed by items waiting to be processed; for example, a list of
print jobs waiting to be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.7. queued attach ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

queued attach

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), an incoming allocate
request that is queued by attach manager until the transaction program named in
the request issues a RECEIVE_ALLOCATE verb.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17.8. quiesce ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

quiesce

 1. To become inactive.

 2. To end a process by allowing operations to complete normally.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. R (radio button - run-time dynamic linking) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o radio button
o RAM
o RAM semaphore
o random access
o random access memory (RAM)
o RAS
o RAS programs
o read only
o read-only memory (ROM)
o real mode
o change number of sessions
o real-mode application
o Realtime Interface Co-processor (RIC)
o receive
o receive pacing
o receive queue depth
o receive receptacle
o receptacle
o Recommendation X.25
o record
o record format
o recovery
o redirect
o redirection
o reentrant
o refresh
o refresh interval
o register
o registered network ID
o reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) programs
o remote
o remote controller
o remote device
o remote equipment
o remote initial program load (IPL)
o remote initiation
o remote installation
o remote IPL
o remote IPL requester
o remote IPL server
o Remote Operations (ROP) Service
o remote transaction program
o remote workstation
o repeater
o replace
o replaceable parameter
o replace mode
o request
o request code
o requester
o request header (RH)
o request/response header (RH)
o request/response unit (RU)
o request to send (RTS)
o request unit (RU)
o reset
o reset packet
o reset procedure
o resource
o response
o response file
o response header (RH)
o response indicator
o response unit (RU)
o restart procedure
o restore
o Restructured Extended Executor (REXX)
o retained data
o return code
o reverse charging
o reverse charging acceptance
o reverse video
o revoke
o REXX
o REXX exec
o REXX executable file
o REXXSAA
o RH
o RIC
o ring
o Ring Diagnostics
o ring error limit
o ring in
o ring-level protection
o ring network
o ring out
o ring sequence
o ring station
o ring status
o ring topology
o RIPL
o ROM
o ROP Service
o rotate
o round-robin scheduling
o route
o router
o route selection control vector (RSCV)
o route selection services (RSS)
o route weight
o routine
o routing
o routing order
o routing table
o RSCV
o RSS
o RTS
o RU
o RU chain
o run
o run time
o run-time dynamic linking


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1. radio button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

radio button

A round button on the screen that is used to indicate items in a list from
which only one item can be selected. Contrast with check box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.2. RAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RAM

Random access memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.3. RAM semaphore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RAM semaphore

A semaphore used to serialize different threads of a single process. See
semaphore. Contrast with system semaphore.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.4. random access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

random access

An access mode in which records can be read from, written to, or removed from a
file in any order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5. random access memory (RAM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

random access memory (RAM)

A memory device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in
a nonsequential manner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.6. RAS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RAS

Reliability, availability, and serviceability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.7. RAS programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RAS programs

Reliability, availability, and serviceability programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.8. read only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

read only

A type of access to data that allows it to be read, but not copied, printed, or
modified. See also write protection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.9. read-only memory (ROM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

read-only memory (ROM)

The memory of a computer where contents cannot be modified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.10. real mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

real mode

In the OS/2 operating system, a method of program operation that does not limit
or prevent access to any instructions or areas of storage.  The operating
system loads the entire program into storage and gives the program access to
all system resources. Contrast with protect mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.11. real-mode application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

real-mode application

An application program that does not run in the OS/2 screen group. Contrast
with protect-mode application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.12. Realtime Interface Co-processor (RIC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Realtime Interface Co-processor (RIC)

The generic name given to a family of IBM communication adapters. See also
communication adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.13. receive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

receive

 1. To obtain a message or file from another computer. Contrast with send.

 2. In Communications Manager, the command used to transfer a file from a host.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.14. receive pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

receive pacing

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the pacing of message units being
received by a component. See pacing. Contrast with send pacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.15. receive queue depth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

receive queue depth

The maximum number of commands for an application name that can be held by
Service Point Application (SPA) Router. Commands are held by SPA Router if the
application is not ready to receive them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.16. receive receptacle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

receive receptacle

On the IBM 8219 Optical Fiber Repeater, the receptacle that receives the signal
in the main ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.17. receptacle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

receptacle

Synonym for lobe receptacle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.18. Recommendation X.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Recommendation X.25

A CCITT recommendation for the interface between data terminal equipment (DTE)
and packet-switched data networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.19. record ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

record

A set of data treated as a unit. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.20. record format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

record format

The definition of how data is structured in the records contained in a file.
The definition includes record names, field names, and field descriptions such
as length and data type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.21. recovery ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

recovery

The act of resetting a system or data stored in a system to an operable state
following damage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.22. redirect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

redirect

To change the destination of a data stream; usually used in the context of
redirecting input from a file in place of a computer keyboard or redirecting
output to a file instead of a display terminal. See redirection. and ACDI
redirection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.23. redirection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

redirection

The assigning of a local device name to a remote shared resource on the
network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.24. reentrant ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reentrant

The attribute of a program or routine that allows the same copy of the program
or routine to be used concurrently by two or more tasks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.25. refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

refresh

 1. To update a window or host panel with information changed to its current
    status.  (A)

 2. The process of repeatedly producing a display image on a display surface so
    that the image remains visible. (A) See also Escape key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.26. refresh interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

refresh interval

 1. The time period, in seconds, for updating the application details displayed
    in the main window of Service Point Application (SPA) Router.

 2. The time period, in seconds, for updating the application details displayed
    on a window or screen to keep the image visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.27. register ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

register

 1. A part of internal storage having a specified storage capacity and usually
    intended for a specific purpose. (T)

 2. To establish a link between Service Point Application (SPA) Router and an
    application, where the link is identified by an application name; by
    issuing an OPEN function call, an application registers a name with SPA
    Router.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.28. registered network ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

registered network ID

An 8-byte name included in an IBM-maintained worldwide registry that has a
structured format and is assigned to a particular IBM customer to uniquely
identify a specific network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.29. reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) programs

The programs that facilitate problem determination.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.30. remote ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote

 1. Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed through a
    telecommunication line.

 2. In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), pertaining to the
    fact that the partner logical unit (PLU) or transaction program (TP) is not
    at the local node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.31. remote controller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote controller

A device or system, attached to a communications line, that controls the
operation of one or more remote devices.  Contrast with local controller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.32. remote device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote device

A device whose controller is connected to a system by a communications line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.33. remote equipment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote equipment

The modem and controller that provide the communications connection between a
communications line and remote device or system. This remote equipment is at
the other end of a data link from the host system.  See also remote
workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.34. remote initial program load (remote IPL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote initial program load (remote IPL)

The initial program load of a remote requester by a server on which the
appropriate image is located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.35. remote initiation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote initiation

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), a process by which a
conversation is allocated by a remote logical unit (LU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.36. remote installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote installation

A feature of Communications Manager/2 that allows installation of
Communications Manager on a workstation by an operator working at a remote host
terminal connected by a network to the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.37. remote IPL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote IPL

See remote initial program load.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.38. remote IPL requester ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote IPL requester

A workstation requiring its startup from a remote initial program load (IPL)
server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.39. remote IPL server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote IPL server

A server that provides remote initial program load (IPL) support for one or
more remote IPL requesters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.40. Remote Operations Service (ROPS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Remote Operations Service (ROPS)

 1. A Communications Manager/2 application that enables System/370 NetView
    management of OS/2 networks and applications.

 2. An application that processes on an OS/2 workstation the OS/2 commands that
    are issued by the NetView program through the Service Point Application
    (SPA) Router.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.41. remote transaction program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote transaction program

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the transaction program
at the remote end of the conversation. Contrast with local transaction program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.42. remote workstation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

remote workstation

A workstation that is indirectly connected to the system and needs data
transmission facilities.  See also remote equipment. Contrast with local
workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.43. repeater ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

repeater

At a local node of a local area network (LAN), a device that amplifies or
regenerates data signals to extend the range of transmission between data
stations or to interconnect two branches.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.44. replace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

replace

To substitute one record or file for another record or file. Contrast with
append.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.45. replace mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

replace mode

An entry mode that replaces existing characters with new characters at the text
cursor location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.46. replaceable parameter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

replaceable parameter

A parameter whose value is supplied when a batch or command file is run.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.47. request ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a message unit that signals initiation
of an action or protocol.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.48. request code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request code

A code passed in an application control block to identify which request or
function is being asked to be performed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.49. requester ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

requester

 1. In Server-Requester Programming Interface (SRPI), the application program
    that relays a request to the host computer. Contrast with server.

 2. A computer that accesses shared network resources made available by other
    computers running as servers on the network. See LAN Requester.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.50. request header (RH) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request header (RH)

 1. Control information preceding a request unit.

 2. A 3-byte header preceding a request unit (RU). See request/response header
    (RH). Contrast with response header (RH).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.51. request/response header (RH) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request/response header (RH)

Control information preceding a request/response unit (RU) that specifies the
type of RU (request unit or response unit) and contains control information
associated with that unit. See also request unit (RU), request header (RH), and
response header (RH).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.52. request/response unit (RU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request/response unit (RU)

A generic term for a request unit or a response unit.  See also request unit
(RU) and response unit (RU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.53. request to send (RTS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request to send (RTS)

This signal is raised by Asynchronous Communications Device Interface (ACDI)
prior to establishing a connection, and it is lowered when the connection is
brought down.  This signal works in concert with data terminal ready (DTR) in
that it is always raised after DTR and lowered before DTR.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.54. request unit (RU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

request unit (RU)

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a message unit that signals
    initiation of a particular action or protocol.

 2. A message unit that contains control information such as a request code,
    function management header (FMH), end-user data, or a combination of these
    types of information.

 3. In SNA, a term used for a request unit or a response unit. If positive, the
    response unit may contain additional information (such as session
    parameters in response to BIND SESSION), or if negative, the response unit
    contains sense data defining the exception condition. Contrast with
    response unit (RU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.55. reset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reset

To return a device or process to a clear or initial state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.56. reset packet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reset packet

A packet used to reset a virtual circuit at the interface between the data
terminal equipment (DTE) and the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.57. reset procedure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reset procedure

A reset procedure reinitializes flow control on a virtual circuit and, in doing
so, eliminates all data that is in transit for the virtual circuit when it is
reset.  The connectivity of the virtual circuit is maintained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.58. resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

resource

 1. Any facility of a computing system or operating system required by a job or
    task, and including memory, input/output (I/O) devices, processing unit,
    data files, and control or processing programs.

 2. In Presentation Manager, the means of providing extra information used in
    the definition of a window. A resource can contain definitions of fonts,
    templates, accelerators, and mnemonics; the definitions are held in a
    resource file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.59. response ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

response

 1. A message unit that acknowledges receipt of a request; a response consists
    of a response header (RH), a response unit (RU), or both.

 2. The output generated by a command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.60. response file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

response file

An ASCII readable file created by a system administrator that contains
information required to install and configure Communications Manager/2 for a
given workstation. A response file can be used to customize a base
configuration file to meet the needs of a specific user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.61. response header (RH) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

response header (RH)

A header, optionally followed by a response unit, that indicates whether the
response is positive or negative, and which may contain a pacing response. See
request/response header (RH). Contrast with request header (RH).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.62. response indicator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

response indicator

A 1-character field passed with an input record from the system to a program to
provide information about the data record or actions taken by the workstation
user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.63. response unit (RU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

response unit (RU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a message that acknowledges a request
unit. Contrast with request unit (RU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.64. restart procedure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

restart procedure

A procedure used by data terminal equipment (DTE) devices or data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) devices to clear all virtual calls and
reset all permanent virtual circuits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.65. restore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

restore

 1. A choice that returns a window to the size it was and the position it was
    in before the user minimized or maximized the window.

 2. An OS/2 command that restores files that have been backed up. See also save
    and back up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.66. Restructured Extended Executor (REXX) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restructured Extended Executor (REXX)

A general purpose programming language that provides a structured environment
for an interpreted language. See also Procedures Language/2 REXX.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.67. retained data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

retained data

The graphics primitives that are remembered by Presentation Interface after
they have been drawn.  Contrast with nonretained data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.68. return code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

return code

A value returned to a program to indicate the results of an operation requested
by that program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.69. reverse charging ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reverse charging

An X.25 optional facility that allows data terminal equipment (DTE) to request
that the cost of a communications session be charged to the DTE that is called.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.70. reverse charging acceptance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reverse charging acceptance

An X.25 optional facility that enables data terminal equipment (DTE) to receive
incoming calls that request reverse charging.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.71. reverse video ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

reverse video

A screen emphasis feature that changes both the foreground and background
colors of an item. See also emphasis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.72. revoke ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

revoke

To remove access or authority from a user or a group ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.73. REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REXX

Restructured Extended Executor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.74. REXX exec ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REXX exec

Synonym for REXX executable file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.75. REXX executable file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REXX executable file

A file that contains REXX language instructions that can be executed directly
by the REXX interpreter. Synonymous with REXX exec.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.76. REXXSAA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REXXSAA

Programs that are written in REXX according to SAA specification and are
portable to other SAA environments that also support REXXSAA.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.77. RH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RH

 1. Request header.

 2. Request/response header.

 3. Response header.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.78. RIC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RIC

Realtime Interface Co-processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.79. ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring

See ring network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.80. Ring Diagnostics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ring Diagnostics

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a program to be run in an IBM Personal Computer
that provides the user information regarding the performance of the ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.81. ring error limit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring error limit

In Ring Diagnostics, the point at which the number of soft errors can make ring
operation unreliable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.82. ring in ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring in

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the receive or input receptacle on an access
unit. Contrast with ring out.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.83. ring-level protection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring-level protection

See privilege level


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.84. ring network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring network

A network configuration where a series of attaching devices is connected by
unidirectional transmission links to form a closed path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.85. ring out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring out

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the transmit or output receptacle on an access
unit. Contrast with ring in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.86. ring sequence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring sequence

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the order in which components are connected to a
ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.87. ring station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring station

The functions necessary for connecting to the local area network and for
operating with the token-ring protocols. These functions include token
handling, transferring copied frames from the ring to the storage of the node
being used, maintaining error counters, observing (MAC) sublayer protocols (for
address acquisition, error reporting, or other duties), and (in the
full-function native mode) directing frames to the correct data link control
(DLC) link station.  A ring station is an instance of a MAC sublayer in a node
attached to a ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.88. ring status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring status

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the condition of the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.89. ring topology ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ring topology

In communications, a logically circular, unidirectional transmission path
without defined ends. Control can be distributed or centralized. See remote
initial program load.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.90. RIPL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RIPL

remote initial program load


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.91. ROM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ROM

Read-only memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.92. ROP Service ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ROP Service

Remote Operations Service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.93. rotate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

rotate

In computer graphics, to turn all or part of a display image about an axis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.94. round-robin scheduling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

round-robin scheduling

In the OS/2 operating system, a process that allows each thread to run for a
specified time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.95. route ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

route

An ordered sequence of nodes and transmission groups (TGs) that represent a
path from an origin node to a destination node traversed by the traffic
exchanged between them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.96. router ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

router

 1. A program that assigns the path by which a message will reach its
    destination.

 2. In SNA, a program that forwards a message unit along a particular path
    through a network, as determined by parameters carried in the message unit,
    such as the destination network address in a transmission header.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.97. route selection control vector (RSCV) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

route selection control vector (RSCV)

A X'2B' control vector that describes a route in an advanced peer-to-peer
networking (APPN) network.  The RSCV consists of an ordered sequence of control
vectors-either TG Descriptor (X'46') control vectors (when carried in the BIND
RU) or Network-Qualified Name (X'0E') control vectors (when carried in the
Locate search message)-that identify the TGs and nodes that make up the path
from an origin node to a destination node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.98. route selection services (RSS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

route selection services (RSS)

A type 2.1 facility that determines the preferred route between a specified
pair of nodes for a given class of service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.99. route weight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

route weight

A value computed for the set of transmission groups (TGs) and intermediate
nodes interconnecting an origin and destination node; route weight determines
which route is preferred during the route selection process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.100. routine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

routine

A program or part of a program that may have some general or frequent use. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.101. routing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

routing

In communications, the assignment of the path by which data will reach its
destination.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.102. routing order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

routing order

The order in which user requests for printers and serial devices are routed to
the device on the device queue (generally in chronological order by request
time).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.103. routing table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

routing table

In X.25 support, a table that controls the routing of incoming calls to
applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.104. RSCV ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RSCV

Route selection control vector.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.105. RSS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RSS

Route selection services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.106. RTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RTS

Request to send.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.107. RU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RU

 1. Request unit.

 2. Request/response unit.

 3. Response unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.108. RU chain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RU chain

A set of related request/response units (RUs) that are consecutively
transmitted in one direction over a session.  Each RU belongs to only one
chain, which has a beginning and an end indicated by control bits in
request/response headers within the RU chain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.109. run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

run

To cause a program, object, utility, or other machine function to be performed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.110. run time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

run time

 1. The elapsed time taken for the execution of a computer program.

 2. The time during which a program is active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.111. run-time dynamic linking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

run-time dynamic linking

A mechanism for delaying the binding of external references in a program module
beyond load time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. S (SAA - system trace utility) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o SAA
o SABM
o SAP
o SATF
o save
o SBCS
o scale
o screen
o screen device context
o screen group
o scroll
o scrollable entry field
o scrollable selection field
o scroll bar
o scrolling arrows
o SCS
o SDLC
o search
o secondary half-session
o secondary link station
o secondary logical unit (SLU)
o security
o segment
o segmentation
o segmenting of BIUs
o select
o selection button
o selection cursor
o semaphore
o send
o send pacing
o sense code
o sense data
o sequential access
o serial device
o serial device pool
o serial device port
o serial device queue
o serial-in, parallel-out
o serially reusable resource
o serial port
o serial transmission
o server
o server alias
o Server-Requester Programming Interface (SRPI)
o service access point (SAP)
o service coordinator
o service key
o ServiceLine
o ServiceLine Access diskette
o service point
o Service Point Application (SPA) Router
o service point command facility (SPCF)
o service TP
o service transaction program (service TP)
o session
o session activation
o session deactivation
o session-initiation request
o session layer
o session-layer component
o session-level encryption (SLE)
o session-level pacing
o session limit
o session partner
o session path
o session security
o session segment
o session services (SS)
o session stage
o session-termination request
o set asynchronous balanced mode (SABM)
o shared-access transport facility (SATF)
o shared data segment
o shared memory
o shared RAM
o shared resource
o short name
o short-session ID
o short string
o shutdown
o sibling window
o single-byte character set (SBCS)
o single-choice selection field
o single session
o single-user
o SLE
o slider
o slider arm
o SLU
o SN
o SNA
o SNA character string (SCS)
o SNA controller
o SNA gateway
o SNA LU session type 6.2 protocol
o SNA network
o SNBU
o soft error
o sort
o source address
o source code
o source file
o source module
o source program
o source service access point (SSAP)
o space parity
o SPA Router
o spawn
o SPCF
o special character
o sphere of control
o Spool Queue Manager
o spooler
o spooler queue
o SRPI
o SRPI router
o SS
o SSAP
o SSCP
o SSCP-dependent LU
o SSCP-independent LU
o SSCP-LU session
o SSCP-PU session
o SSCP-SSCP session
o stack
o stack pointer
o stand-alone dump
o standard input
o standard output
o start delimiter
o startup drive
o starvation
o star wiring
o statement
o statically defined peer-to-peer session
o station
o station negotiation
o stop bits
o storage
o storage allocation
o string
o style
o subarea
o subarea address
o subarea LU
o subarea network
o subarea node (SN)
o subconsole
o subdirectory
o subfield
o subroutine
o subsystem management
o subvector
o supervisory
o Support Center
o support personnel
o suspend
o SVC
o swap file
o swapping
o switch
o switched line
o switched network backup (SNBU)
o switched virtual circuit (SVC)
o switch list
o symbolic name
o synchronization level
o synchronous
o Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC)
o synchronous data transfer
o synchronous transmission
o SYSADM
o system
o system administrator (SYSADM)
o system definition
o system diskette
o System Editor
o system generation
o system menu
o system name
o system queue
o Systems Application Architecture (SAA)
o system semaphore
o system services control point (SSCP)
o Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
o system storage
o system trace
o system trace formatter
o system trace utility


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.1. SAA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SAA

Systems Application Architecture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.2. SABM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SABM

Set asynchronous balanced mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.3. SAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SAP

Service access point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.4. SATF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SATF

Shared-access transport facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.5. save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

save

 1. A choice that stores an object onto a storage device, such as a disk or
    diskette.

 2. A function that retains window size or position following a sizing or
    moving action.  See also restore.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.6. SBCS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SBCS

Single-byte character set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.7. scale ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

scale

 1. To change the representation of a quantity, expressing it in other units,
    so that its range is brought within a specified range. (A)

 2. In computer graphics, to enlarge all or part of a display image.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.8. screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

screen

The physical surface of a display device upon which information is presented to
the user.  See also window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.9. screen device context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

screen device context

A logical description of data destination that is a particular window on the
screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.10. screen group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

screen group

An OS/2 or DOS session. The OS/2 program allows multiple applications to run
concurrently; each application can access the display screen.  Synonymous with
session in the OS/2 program. See also virtual DOS machine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.11. scroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

scroll

To move all or part of a display image vertically or horizontally so new data
is displayed at one edge as the preceding data is no longer displayed at the
opposite edge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.12. scrollable entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

scrollable entry field

An entry field larger than the visible field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.13. scrollable selection field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

scrollable selection field

A selection field that contains more choices than are visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.14. scroll bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

scroll bar

A host panel element associated with a scrollable panel area and used in
graphics mode only, which indicates the direction of additional panel
information not visible in the panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.15. scrolling arrows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

scrolling arrows

A type of scrolling information used on character screens. Scrolling arrows
consist of the word More followed by symbols indicating the direction in which
more information is available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.16. SCS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SCS

SNA character string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.17. SDLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SDLC

Synchronous Data Link Control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.18. search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

search

 1. The process of looking for a specific item.

 2. To scan one or more data elements of a set in order to find elements that
    have a certain property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.19. secondary half-session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

secondary half-session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the half-session on the node that
receives the session-activation request. See also secondary logical unit (SLU).
See half-session and primary half-session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.20. secondary link station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

secondary link station

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), any link station that is not the primary
link station.  A secondary link station can exchange data with the primary link
station, but not with other secondary link stations.  Contrast with primary
link station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.21. secondary logical unit (SLU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

secondary logical unit (SLU)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the logical unit (LU) that contains the
secondary half-session for a particular LU-LU session.  A logical unit can
contain secondary and primary half-sessions for different active LU-LU
sessions.  See primary logical unit (PLU).  See also secondary half-session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.22. security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

security

The technological and managerial safeguards established and applied to a
program or network to protect them from unauthorized access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.23. segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

segment

 1. A portion of a computer program that may be executed without the entire
    computer program being resident in main storage. (T)

 2. In the OS/2 program, a variable-length area of contiguous storage
    addresses.

 3. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a portion of a network that can contain
    cables, components, or lobes.

 4. In SNA, the portion of a basic information unit (BIU) that is contained
    within a path information unit (PIU). It consists of either a
    request/response header (RH) followed by a request/response unit (RU) or
    only part of an RU. See also segmenting of BIUs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.24. segmentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

segmentation

A process by which path control (PC) divides basic information units (BIUs)
into smaller units, called BIU segments, to accommodate smaller buffer sizes in
adjacent nodes.  Both segmentation and segment assembly are optional PC
features.  The support for either or both is indicated in the BIND request and
response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.25. segmenting of BIUs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

segmenting of BIUs

In communications, an optional function of path control that divides a basic
information unit (BIU) received from transmission control into two or more path
information units (PIUs). See also segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.26. select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

select

To explicitly identify one or more objects a subsequent choice will apply to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.27. selection button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

selection button

The button on a pointing device that a user presses to select an object. For
example, mouse button 1 is the select button on a two-button mouse.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.28. selection cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

selection cursor

A keyboard cursor, in the shape of a dotted outline box, that moves as users
indicate the choice they want to interact with. Synonym for cursor. See text
cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.29. semaphore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

semaphore

A signal mechanism used to control access to system resources.  See RAM
semaphore and system semaphore.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.30. send ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

send

 1. To send a message or file to another computer. Contrast with receive.

 2. For Communications Manager, the command used to transfer a file to a host.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.31. send pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

send pacing

In SNA, the pacing of message units that a component is sending. See pacing.
Contrast with receive pacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.32. sense code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

sense code

A code that identifies an error in SNA.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.33. sense data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

sense data

In SNA, a set of data sent with a negative response, indicating the reason for
the response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.34. sequential access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

sequential access

An access method in which records are read from, written to, or removed from a
file based on the physical order of the records.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.35. serial device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial device

A resource (such as a modem or plotter) attached to an LPT or COM port for
direct input/output (I/O) use.  Contrast with parallel device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.36. serial device pool ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial device pool

In local area network (LAN) communications, a group of similar serial devices,
created by the network administrator, to satisfy simultaneous demands for use
by requesters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.37. serial device port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial device port

See serial port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.38. serial device queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial device queue

In local area network (LAN) communications, an ordered list of network requests
from users waiting to access a serial device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.39. serial-in, parallel-out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial-in, parallel-out

A method of receiving data by way of the universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART). See also universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.40. serially reusable resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serially reusable resource

A logical resource or object that can be accessed by only one task at a time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.41. serial port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial port

A connector on a serial device to which cables for other devices are attached.
Contrast with parallel port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.42. serial transmission ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

serial transmission

The sequential transmission of the signal elements of a group representing a
character or other entity of data. (I)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.43. server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

server

 1. On a local area network (LAN), a data station that provides facilities to
    other data stations.

 2. A computer that shares its resources with other computers on the network.
    See communications server.

 3. An application on the host that processes Server-Requester Programming
    Interface (SRPI) requests. Contrast with requester.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.44. server alias ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

server alias

A locally known pseudonym (or nickname) for a Server-Requester Programming
Interface (SRPI) server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.45. Server-Requester Programming Interface (SRPI) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Server-Requester Programming Interface (SRPI)

An application programming interface (API) used by requester and server
programs to communicate with the personal computer or host routers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.46. service access point (SAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service access point (SAP)

 1. In a local area network (LAN), the logical point at which an n-plus-one
    (n+1) layer entity acquires the services of the n layer. A single SAP can
    have many links ending it.

 2. A logical address that allows a system to route data between a remote
    device and the appropriate communications support. In Communications
    Manager, for example, local SAP 04 is used for SNA communications over a
    LAN.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.47. service coordinator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service coordinator

A person responsible for ensuring problem determination support for programs.
See also support personnel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.48. service key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service key

One of two access passwords used to unlock the keylock for Communications
Manager.  See master key. See also keylock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.49. ServiceLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ServiceLine

See IBM ServiceLine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.50. ServiceLine Access diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ServiceLine Access diskette

An IBM-provided diskette that allows the service coordinator access to
ServiceLine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.51. service point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service point

An entry point that supports applications providing network management for a
resource not under its own direct control as an entry point.  Each resource is
either under the direct control of another entry point or not under the direct
control of any entry point.  A service point accessing these resources is not
required to use SNA sessions.  A service point is needed when entry point
support is not yet available for some network management function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.52. Service Point Application (SPA) Router ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Service Point Application (SPA) Router

A program that receives commands issued from the NetView program and sends the
commands to an application to be processed on an OS/2 workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.53. service point command facility (SPCF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service point command facility (SPCF)

A facility provided at a service point, usually in the form of an API, so that
applications residing in the service point can respond to network management
requests from the NetView program residing in a control point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.54. service TP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service TP

Service transaction program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.55. service transaction program (service TP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

service transaction program (service TP)

 1. A transaction program implemented by a transaction processing system.
    Service transaction programs perform such functions as providing access to
    remote DL/1 databases and remote queues.

 2. Transaction programs that provide a system or generic service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.56. session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session

 1. In Communications Manager, any host communications session that a user has
    started.

 2. The period of time during which a user of a terminal can communicate with
    an interactive system, usually the elapsed time between logon and logoff.

 3. A logical connection between two stations or Systems Network Architecture
    (SNA) network accessible units (NAUs) that allows the two stations or NAUs
    to communicate.

 4. A logical connection between two NAUs that can be activated, tailored to
    provide various protocols, and deactivated, as requested. The session
    activation request and response can determine options for such things as
    the rate and concurrency of data exchange, the control of contention and
    error recovery, and the characteristics of the data stream. Sessions
    compete for network resources, such as the links, within the path control
    network. For routing purposes, each session is identified by the network or
    local addresses of the session partners. See CP-CP session, half-session,
    LU-LU session, SSCP-LU session, SSCP-PU session, and SSCP-SSCP session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.57. session activation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session activation

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the process of exchanging an ACTLU
(activate logical unit) and a positive response between network accessible
units (NAUs).  See also session deactivation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.58. session deactivation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session deactivation

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the process of exchanging a session
deactivation request and response between network accessible units (NAUs).  See
also session activation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.59. session-initiation request ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session-initiation request

In communications, an Initiate (INIT) or logon request from a logical unit (LU)
to a control point that asks for the LU-LU session to be activated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.60. session layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session layer

The composite layer consisting of the data flow control and transmission
control layers forming the half-sessions and session connectors in the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.61. session-layer component ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session-layer component

A half-session or session connector.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.62. session-level encryption (SLE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session-level encryption (SLE)

In Communications Manager, the encryption of data sent to the host from a
workstation during a Communications Manager session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.63. session-level pacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session-level pacing

A flow control technique that permits a receiving half-session or session
connector to control the data transfer rate (the rate at which it receives
request units) on the normal flow.  The technique is used to prevent
overloading a receiver with unprocessed requests when the sender can generate
requests faster than the receiver can process them. See also flow control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.64. session limit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session limit

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the maximum number of concurrently
active LU-LU sessions a particular logical unit (LU) can support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.65. session partner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session partner

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), one of the two network accessible units
(NAUs) participating in an active session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.66. session path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session path

The half-sessions delimiting a given session and their interconnection
(including any intermediate session connectors).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.67. session security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session security

A Systems Network Architecture (SNA) function that allows data to be
transmitted in encrypted form.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.68. session segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session segment

A synonym for session stage, when the session components delimiting the stage
are in physically adjacent nodes, as in an Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
(APPN) network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.69. session services (SS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session services (SS)

One of the types of network services in the control point (CP) and in the
logical unit (LU).  These services provide facilities for an LU or a network
operator to request that a control point (an end node control point (ENCP), a
network node control point (NNCP), or a system services control point (SSCP))
assist with initiating or terminating sessions between LUs.  Assistance with
session termination is needed only by SSCP-dependent LUs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.70. session stage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

session stage

The portion of a session path consisting of two session-layer components that
are logically adjacent (no other session-layer components between them) and
their interconnection.  An example is the paired session-layer components in
adjacent type 2.1 nodes and their interconnection over the link between them.
A session path can consist of one stage, as between LUs in two physically
adjacent nodes; two stages, as in a session having one intermediate boundary
function; or more than two stages, as in an APPN network where the number of
stages equals one less than the number of nodes in the path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.71. session-termination request ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In communications, a Terminate-Self (TERM-SELF) or Shutdown (SHUTD) request
from a logical unit (LU) to a control point or session partner, respectively,
that asks for the LU-LU session to be deactivated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.72. set asynchronous balanced mode (SABM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

set asynchronous balanced mode (SABM)

A high-level data link control (HDLC) command for peer-to-peer communications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.73. shared-access transport facility (SATF) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

shared-access transport facility (SATF)

A transmission facility, such as a multipoint link connection, a public
switched network, or a token ring, on which multiple pairs of nodes can form
concurrently active links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.74. shared data segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

shared data segment

A data area created in memory that can be shared by programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.75. shared memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

shared memory

An OS/2 feature that allows system memory to be shared among processes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.76. shared RAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

shared RAM

Random access storage on the adapter that is shared by an IBM personal
computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.77. shared resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

shared resource

A directory (files resource), printer, or serial device made available to users
on a network. The shared resources are directly attached to servers that share
them but are not attached to the requesters asking to use them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.78. short name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

short name

In Communications Manager, the one-letter name (A through Z) of the host
presentation space or emulation session. Synonymous with presentation space ID
(PSID) and short-session ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.79. short-session ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

short-session ID

Synonym for short name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.80. short string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

short string

A string with an actual length of 254 bytes or less, or a varying-length string
with a maximum length of 254 bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.81. shutdown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

shutdown

In the task manager, the procedure required before the computer is switched off
to ensure that data and configuration information is not lost. See also task
manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.82. sibling window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

sibling window

In Presentation Manager, the child windows that have the same parent window.
See child window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.83. single-byte character set (SBCS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

single-byte character set (SBCS)

A graphic character set in which each character is represented by 1 byte.
Contrast with double-byte character set (DBCS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.84. single-choice selection field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

single-choice selection field

A type of selection field that allows users to select only one choice.
Contrast with multiple-choice selection field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.85. single session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

single session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a session that is the only session
connecting two logical units (LUs). Contrast with parallel sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.86. single-user ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

single-user

 1. Pertaining to operations that are independent of another device, program,
    or system.

 2. In Communications Manager/2, the single-user is the workstation that
    contains the SNA network software. The single-user workstation does not
    share Communications Manager resources with a communications server. All
    product programs are stored on the single-user workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.87. SLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SLE

Session-level encryption.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.88. slider ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

slider

A visual component of a user interface that represents a quantity and its
relationship to the range of possible values for that quantity. A user can also
change the value of the quantity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.89. slider arm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

slider arm

The visual indicator in the slider that a user can move to change numerical
value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.90. SLU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SLU

Secondary logical unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.91. SN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SN

Subarea node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.92. SNA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNA

Systems Network Architecture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.93. SNA character string (SCS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNA character string (SCS)

In SNA, a character string composed of EBCDIC controls, optionally intermixed
with end-user data, that is carried within a request/response unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.94. SNA controller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNA controller

A device in Systems Network Architecture (SNA) that directs the transmission of
information over the data links of a network. Operation of the controller can
be executed by a program in a processor to which the controller is connected or
by a program within the device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.95. SNA gateway ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNA gateway

A feature of Communications Manager that allows an OS/2 workstation to act as a
communications controller between a support workstation, such as a personal
computer on a LAN, and an SNA host. See also gateway session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.96. SNA LU session type 6.2 protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNA LU session type 6.2 protocol

A Systems Network Architecture (SNA) application protocol for communications
between peer systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.97. SNA network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNA network

The part of the user application network that conforms to the formats and
protocols of Systems Network Architecture (SNA). It enables reliable transfer
of data among users and provides protocols for controlling the resources of
various network configurations. The SNA network consists of network accessible
units (NAUs), boundary function components, and the path control network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.98. SNBU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SNBU

Switched network backup.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.99. soft error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

soft error

An intermittent error on a network that causes data to be transmitted more than
once before it is received accurately.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.100. sort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

sort

To arrange a set of items according to keys used as a basis for determining the
sequence of the items; for example, to arrange the records of a personnel file
in alphabetical sequence by using the employee names as sort keys. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.101. source address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

source address

 1. The address of the media access control service access point (MSAP) from
    which a media access control (MAC) frame is originated.

 2. A field in the MAC frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.102. source code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

source code

Synonym for source program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.103. source file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

source file

A file that contains source statements for such items as high-level language
programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.104. source module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

source module

The source statements that constitute the input to a language translator for a
particular translation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.105. source program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

source program

A set of instructions written in a programming language that must be translated
to machine language and compiled before the program can be run. Synonymous with
source code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.106. source service access point (SSAP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

source service access point (SSAP)

 1. The address of the link service access point (LSAP) from which a link
    protocol data unit (LPDU) is originated.

 2. A field in the LPDU. See destination service access point (DSAP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.107. space parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

space parity

A data communications attribute that refers to sending a logical zero for the
parity bit in a character frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.108. SPA Router ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SPA Router

Service Point Application (SPA) Router.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.109. spawn ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

spawn

To create or generate an object; for example, to spawn a task.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.110. SPCF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SPCF

Service point command facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.111. special character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

special character

A graphic character that is not a letter, digit, or blank character, and
usually not an ideogram; for example, a punctuation mark, general currency
symbol, or percent sign. (T) Synonymous with accented character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.112. sphere of control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

sphere of control

The set of control point domains served by a single management services focal
point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.113. spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

spooler

A program that intercepts the data going to a device driver and writes it to
disk. The data is later printed or plotted when the required device is
available. A spooler prevents intermixing of output from different sources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.114. spooler queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

spooler queue

An ordered list of print jobs waiting to access a printer. Synonymous with
printer queue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.115. Spool Queue Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Spool Queue Manager

In Presentation Manager, the part of the spooler that manipulates print jobs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.116. SRPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SRPI

Server-Requester Programming Interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.117. SRPI router ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SRPI router

A component of SRPI that directs requests to the applicable server and directs
responses to the applicable requester.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.118. SS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SS

Session services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.119. SSAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSAP

Source service access point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.120. SSCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSCP

System services control point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.121. SSCP-dependent LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSCP-dependent LU

A logical unit (LU) that requires assistance from a system services control
point (SSCP) to activate an LU-LU session.  It requires an SSCP-LU session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.122. SSCP-independent LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSCP-independent LU

A logical unit (LU) that is able to activate an LU-LU session (that is, send a
BIND request) without assistance from an SSCP.  It does not have a SSCP-LU
session.  Currently, only an LU 6.2 can be an independent LU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.123. SSCP-LU session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSCP-LU session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a session between a system services
control point (SSCP) and a logical unit (LU); the session enables the LU to ask
the SSCP to help initiate LU-LU sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.124. SSCP-PU session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSCP-PU session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a session between a systems services
control point (SSCP) and a physical unit (PU); SSCP-PU sessions enable SSCPs to
send requests to and receive status information from individual nodes to
control the network configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.125. SSCP-SSCP session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SSCP-SSCP session

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a session between the system services
control point (SSCP) in one domain and the SSCP in another domain. An SSCP-SSCP
session is used to initiate and terminate cross-domain LU-LU sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.126. stack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

stack

An area in memory that stores temporary register information, parameters, and
return addresses of subroutines. See also first-in, first-out (FIFO).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.127. stack pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

stack pointer

A register that contains the current location of the top of a stack.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.128. stand-alone dump ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

stand-alone dump

A dump performed separately from normal system operations that does not require
the system to be in a condition for normal operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.129. standard input ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

standard input

The source of data going into a command. Standard input comes from the keyboard
unless redirection or piping is used, in which case standard input can be a
file or another command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.130. standard output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

standard output

The output from a command. Standard output goes to a display unless redirection
or piping is used, in which case standard output can be a file or another
command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.131. start delimiter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

start delimiter

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the first byte of a token or frame. It consists
of a special, recognizable bit arrangement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.132. startup drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

startup drive

The drive that contains the OS/2 operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.133. starvation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

starvation

In an operating system, a situation in which a process cannot complete its
designated task because it is kept waiting too long for processing time or for
a system resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.134. star wiring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

star wiring

In a network, a wiring arrangement in which an individual cable runs from each
work area to a concentration point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.135. statement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

statement

In programming language, a language construct that represents a step in a
sequence of actions or a set of declarations. (I)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.136. statically defined peer-to-peer session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

statically defined peer-to-peer session

In a low-entry networking (LEN) node or Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN)
end node, a session that is set up without assistance from a system services
control point (SSCP) and without invoking any APPN Locate functions.  Routing
information is provided during system definition of the local directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.137. station ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

station

 1. A workstation.

 2. An input or output point in a system that uses telecommunications
    facilities. Synonymous with data station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.138. station negotiation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

station negotiation

A capability that allows two LUs to negotiate the parameters of a session when
the session is being activated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.139. stop bits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

stop bits

In asynchronous communications, the bit or bits used to end the character frame
transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.140. storage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

storage

A medium used to save information, such as a fixed disk. See also memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.141. storage allocation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

storage allocation

Synonym for memory allocation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.142. string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

string

A sequence of elements of the same nature, such as characters, considered as a
whole. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.143. style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

style

Synonym for window style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.144. subarea ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subarea

In communications, a portion of the SNA network consisting of a subarea node,
attached peripheral nodes, and associated resources.  Within a subarea node,
all network accessible units (NAUs), links, and adjacent link stations that are
addressable within the subarea share a common subarea address and have distinct
element addresses. See also path control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.145. subarea address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subarea address

A value in the subarea field of the network address that identifies a
particular subarea. See element address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.146. subarea LU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subarea LU

A logical unit that resides in a subarea node. Contrast with peripheral LU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.147. subarea network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subarea network

Interconnected subareas, their directly attached peripheral nodes, and the
transmission groups that connect them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.148. subarea node (SN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subarea node (SN)

A node that uses network addresses for routing and whose routing tables are
therefore affected by changes in the configuration of the network. Subarea
nodes can provide gateway function to connect multiple subarea networks,
intermediate routing function, and boundary function support for peripheral
nodes.  Type 4 and type 5 nodes are subarea nodes.  See also boundary function
(BF), boundary node (BN), node, node type, and peripheral node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.149. subconsole ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subconsole

A display station that controls one or more printers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.150. subdirectory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subdirectory

A directory contained within another directory in a file system hierarchy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.151. subfield ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subfield

A subdivision of a field, that is, a field within a field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.152. subroutine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subroutine

A sequenced set of instruction or statements that may be used in one or more
computer programs and at one or more points in a computer program. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.153. subsystem management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subsystem management

In Communications Manager, a group of advanced functions for diagnosis and
problem resolution. These functions are typically used by system administrators
and application programmers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.154. subvector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subvector

A subcomponent of the media access control (MAC) major vector.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.155. supervisory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

supervisory

Pertaining to a frame format that performs data link control functions such as
acknowledging information frames, requesting retransmission, and requesting
temporary suspension of transmission. Receive ready (RR), receive not ready
(RNR), and reject (REJ) are examples of supervisory frame formats.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.156. Support Center ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Support Center

See IBM Support Center.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.157. support personnel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

support personnel

Local individuals who may perform the role of service coordinator for
Communications Manager problem determination. These individuals are frequently
system administrators, hardware personnel, host personnel, or application
programmers. See also service coordinator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.158. suspend ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

suspend

 1. An action that causes an active program to become temporarily inactive.

 2. A situation where a program is waiting indefinitely for some condition to
    be satisfied. See also deadlock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.159. SVC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SVC

Switched virtual circuit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.160. swap file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

swap file

A file that contains segments of a program or data temporarily moved out of
main memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.161. swapping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

swapping

A process that moves segments between memory and storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.162. switch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

switch

An action that moves the input focus from one area to another. A switch can be
within the same window or from one window to another. See also toggle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.163. switched line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

switched line

A telecommunication line in which the connection is established by dialing.
Contrast with nonswitched line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.164. switched network backup (SNBU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

switched network backup (SNBU)

A feature of the modem that allows a nonswitched line to be used alternatively
as a switched line or allows a switched line to be used as a nonswitched line,
depending on the characteristics of the modem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.165. switched virtual circuit (SVC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

switched virtual circuit (SVC)

A virtual circuit that is requested by a virtual call. It is released when the
virtual circuit is cleared. See permanent virtual circuit (PVC) and virtual
circuit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.166. switch list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

switch list

In the task manager, the list of programs that are active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.167. symbolic name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

symbolic name

In a programming language, a unique name used to represent an entity such as a
field, file, data structure, or label.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.168. synchronization level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

synchronization level

In advanced program-to-program communications (APPC), the specification
indicating whether the corresponding transaction programs exchange
configuration requests and replies.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.169. synchronous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

synchronous

Pertaining to two or more processes that depend upon the occurrences of
specific events such as a common timing signal. (T) Contrast with asynchronous.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.170. Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC)

A communications protocol for managing synchronous, code-transparent,
serial-by-bit information transfer over a link connection. Transmission
exchanges can be duplex or half-duplex, over switched or nonswitched links.
Contrast with binary synchronous communication (BSC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.171. synchronous data transfer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

synchronous data transfer

A physical transfer of data to or from a device that has a predictable time
relationship with the execution of an input/output (I/O) request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.172. synchronous transmission ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

synchronous transmission

In data communication, a method of transmission in which the sending and
receiving of characters are controlled by timing signals. Contrast with
asynchronous transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.173. SYSADM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SYSADM

System administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.174. system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system

A computer and its associated devices and programs. See also workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.175. system administrator (SYSADM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system administrator (SYSADM)

In Communications Manager, the person with responsibility for installing,
configuring, and setting up local communications networks, and ensuring the
proper use of Communications Manager on all supported hardware.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.176. system definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system definition

The time before a system is put into use when desired functions and operations
of the system are selected from various available options. Synonymous with
system generation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.177. system diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system diskette

A fixed disk or diskette that can be used to start a system or workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.178. System Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System Editor

A text editor provided as part of the base operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.179. system generation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system generation

Synonym for system definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.180. system menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system menu

See title bar icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.181. system name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system name

 1. An IBM-supplied name that uniquely identifies the system.  It is used as a
    network attribute for certain communications applications such as advanced
    program-to-program communications (APPC).

 2. An IBM-defined name that has a predefined meaning to the COBOL compiler.
    System names include computer names, language names, device names, and
    function names.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.182. system queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system queue

In Presentation Interface, the master queue for all pointing device or keyboard
events.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.183. Systems Application Architecture (SAA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Systems Application Architecture (SAA)

A set of software interfaces, conventions, and protocols that provide a
framework for designing and developing applications across multiple computing
environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.184. system semaphore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system semaphore

A signal mechanism providing control between threads of multiple processes
which can be used by processes that do not share memory. See semaphore.
Contrast with RAM semaphore.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.185. system services control point (SSCP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system services control point (SSCP)

 1. In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), a control point in a host node that
    provides network services for dependent nodes.

 2. A control point within a subarea network for managing the configuration,
    coordinating the network operator and problem determination requests, and
    providing the session services and directory support for end users of the
    network.  Multiple SSCPs, cooperating as peers with one another, can divide
    the network into domains of control with each SSCP having a hierarchical
    control relationship to the physical units and logical units within its own
    domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.186. Systems Network Architecture (SNA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Systems Network Architecture (SNA)

The description of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and operational
sequences for transmitting information units through the networks and also the
operational sequences for controlling the configuration and operation of
networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.187. system storage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system storage

The program-addressable memory from which instructions and other data can be
loaded directly into registers for subsequent processing. See extended storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.188. system trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system trace

A historical record of specific events in the execution of the base operating
system.  The record is usually produced for debugging purposes.  See also trace
buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.189. system trace formatter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system trace formatter

In the base operating system, a diagnostic tool used to retrieve system trace
data from the system trace buffer and format the data for a display, printer,
or a file.  See system trace utility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.190. system trace utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

system trace utility

In the base operating system, a diagnostic tool used to capture a sequence of
system events, function calls, or data for analysis.  See system trace
formatter and trace buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. T (tab - type 5 node) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o tab
o tag
o task
o task manager
o task-time
o TC layer
o TCAM
o TDLC
o TDU
o telecommunication facility
o telecommunication line
o Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM)
o template
o temporary storage
o terminal
o terminal operator
o Terminate
o text
o text cursor
o TG
o TG vector
o TG weight
o TH
o thousands separator
o thrashing
o thread
o throughput
o throughput class negotiation
o time-critical process
o timeout
o time-out condition
o Time Sharing Option (TSO)
o time slice
o title bar
o title bar icon
o toggle
o token
o token-claiming
o token ring
o token-ring network
o topology
o topology and routing services (TRS)
o topology database
o Topology Database Update (TDU)
o topology services
o TP
o trace
o trace buffer
o trace services
o transaction
o transaction program (TP)
o transaction service layer
o transfer file
o transfer request
o transform
o transformation
o transmission control characters
o transmission control (TC) layer
o transmission facility
o transmission frame
o transmission group (TG)
o transmission header (TH)
o transmission medium
o transmission priority
o transmission service mode
o transmission service mode profile
o transmit
o transport network
o trap
o TRS
o truncation
o TSO
o twinaxial
o twinaxial cable
o twinaxial data link control (TDLC)
o twinaxial feature
o type 2.0 node
o type 2.1 (T2.1) end node
o type 2.1 (T2.1) intermediate routing network
o type 2.1 (T2.1) network
o type 2.1 (T2.1) network node
o type 2.1 (T2.1) node
o type 4 node
o type 5 node


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.1. tab ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

tab

A typing action that moves the selection cursor to the next entry field,
selection field, or to the next tab position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.2. tag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

tag

One or more characters attached to a set of data that contain information about
the set, including its identification. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.3. task ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

task

In a multiprogramming or multiprocessing environment, one or more sequences of
instructions treated by a control program as an element of work to be
accomplished by a computer. (I) (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.4. task manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

task manager

In the base operating system, the function that controls starting and stopping
programs, and controls which program has the input focus. It also allows the
user to shut down the system. See also shutdown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.5. task-time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

task-time

Pertaining to executing code as a thread within a process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.6. TC layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TC layer

Transmission control layer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.7. TCAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TCAM

Telecommunications Access Method.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.8. TDLC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TDLC

Twinaxial data link control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.9. TDU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TDU

Topology Database Update.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.10. telecommunication facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

telecommunication facility

Transmission capabilities, or the means for providing such capabilities, made
available by a communication common carrier or by a telecommunication
administration. Synonymous with transmission facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.11. telecommunication line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

telecommunication line

Any physical medium, such as a wire or microwave beam, that is used to transmit
data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.12. Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM)

See Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method
(ACF/TCAM).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.13. template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

template

 1. In Presentation Manager, a data structure that defines the size, position,
    and appearance of a collection of windows.  Templates can be defined for
    secondary windows and menus.

 2. On an IBM personal computer, a line entered from the keyboard and stored in
    memory that can be retrieved, used again, or modified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.14. temporary storage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

temporary storage

In computer programming, memory reserved for intermediate results.  (A)
Synonymous with working storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.15. terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

terminal

In data communication, a device, usually equipped with a keyboard and display
screen, capable of sending and receiving information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.16. terminal operator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

terminal operator

The user of an Emulator High-Level Language Application Programming Interface
(EHLLAPI) application program. Contrast with programmed operator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.17. Terminate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Terminate

An option of a task manager that allows the user to stop a program without
saving data or configuration information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.18. text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

text

A set of characters or symbols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.19. text cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

text cursor

A symbol displayed in text that shows a user where typed input will appear.
Synonym for cursor. See selection cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.20. TG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TG

Transmission group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.21. TG vector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TG vector

A representation of an end point transmission group (TG) in a T2.1 network,
consisting of two control vectors:  the TG Descriptor (X'46') control vector
and the TG Characteristics (X'47') control vector.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.22. TG weight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TG weight

A quantitative measure of how well the values of a transmission group's (TG's)
characteristics satisfy the criteria specified by the class of service (COS)
definition as computed during route selection for a session.  If the TG does
not satisfy the criteria specified by the COS definition, it is assigned an
infinite weight.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.23. TH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TH

Transmission header.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.24. thousands separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

thousands separator

A character that separates on numeric fields with a value greater than 999.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.25. thrashing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

thrashing

A condition in which the system can do little useful work because of system
overloads such as swapping or starting and stopping communication links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.26. thread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

thread

The smallest unit of execution within a process that is not identifiable
outside of its parent process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.27. throughput ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

throughput

 1. A measure of the amount of work performed by a computer system over a
    period of time, for example, number of jobs per day. (I) (A)

 2. In data communication, the total traffic between stations per unit of time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.28. throughput class negotiation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

throughput class negotiation

A packet-switching data network optional facility that allows data terminal
equipment (DTE) to negotiate the speed at which its packets travel through the
packet-switching data network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.29. time-critical process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

time-critical process

A process or program that must be active within specific intervals in order not
to lose data or other input.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.30. timeout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

timeout

A time interval allotted for certain operations to occur.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.31. time-out condition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

time-out condition

A condition indicating that a specified amount of waiting time has elapsed
without the occurrence of an expected event.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.32. Time Sharing Option (TSO) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Time Sharing Option (TSO)

An IBM MVS host facility that allows terminal users to share time on a
mainframe.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.33. time slice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

time slice

A designated interval of time allocated for processing a thread.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.34. title bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

title bar

The area at the top of each window that contains the system menu symbol, a
small icon, a window title, and the maximize, minimize, and restore buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.35. title bar icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

title bar icon

An icon in the leftmost part of the title bar. It contains choices that affect
the window or the view it contains. It can also be used to close a program and
to select the window list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.36. toggle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

toggle

 1. The ability to switch between two modes; for example, insert and replace.

 2. To switch between two modes; for example, on a personal computer connected
    to a network, to switch between the data entry and command entry modes or
    between stand-alone operation and terminal emulation.  See also switch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.37. token ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

token

In a local area network (LAN), the symbol of authority passed among data
stations to indicate the station temporarily in control of the transmission
medium.  It consists of a starting delimiter, a frame control field, and an
ending delimiter.  The frame control field contains a token indicator bit that
indicates to a receiving station that the token is ready to accept information.
If the station has data to send along the network, it appends the data to the
token.  The token then becomes a frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.38. token-claiming ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

token-claiming

A line-control scheme in which stations on a line compete for the use of that
unused line; the station that is successful in gaining control of the line is
able to transmit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.39. token ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

token ring

A network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one attaching device to
another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.40. token-ring network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

token-ring network

See IBM Token-Ring Network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.41. topology ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

topology

The schematic arrangement of the links and nodes of a network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.42. topology and routing services (TRS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

topology and routing services (TRS)

An Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) control point component that manages
the topology database and computes routes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.43. topology database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

topology database

See network topology database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.44. Topology Database Update (TDU) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Topology Database Update (TDU)

 1. A defined APPN flow between network nodes that carries changes to the
    topology; for example, information about a new node or a failed link.

 2. A message broadcast among Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) network
    nodes to maintain the network topology database, which is fully replicated
    in each network node. A TDU contains information to identify the sending
    node, node and link characteristics about various resources of the network,
    and update sequence numbers to identify the most recent updates for each of
    the resources described.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.45. topology services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

topology services

A portion of the APPN protocols that maintains the network topology at each
network node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.46. TP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TP

Transaction program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.47. trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trace

 1. A record of data that provides a history of events that occurred in a
    system.

 2. The process of recording the sequence in which the statements in a program
    are executed. In addition, the values of the program variables used in the
    statements can be recorded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.48. trace buffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trace buffer

An allocation of space on a system for trace information. See also system
trace.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.49. trace services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trace services

In Communications Manager, a menu-driven utility used to trace application
programming interfaces (APIs) and data transmitted on communication links. See
also probe trip.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.50. transaction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transaction

An exchange between a workstation and a program, between two workstations, or
between two programs that accomplishes a particular action or result.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.51. transaction program (TP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transaction program (TP)

A program that uses the advanced program-to-program communications (APPC)
application programming interface (API) to communicate with a partner
application program at a remote node. A transaction program (TP) has a valid TP
identifier (TP ID).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.52. transaction service layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transaction service layer

The layer that includes service transaction programs and provides configuration
services, directory services, management services, session services, and
topology and routing services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.53. transfer file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transfer file

To send a file from one computer to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.54. transfer request ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transfer request

A description of the file you want to transfer to your personal computer from
the AS/400 system or from your personal computer to the AS/400 system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.55. transform ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transform

 1. In graphics, the action of modifying a picture, for example, by scaling,
    rotating, or displacing.

 2. The object that performs or defines such a modification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.56. transformation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transformation

See transform.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.57. transmission control characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission control characters

In data communications, the special characters that are included in a message
to control communications over a data link. For example, the sending station
and the receiving station use transmission control characters to exchange
information; the receiving station uses transmission control characters to
indicate errors in data it receives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.58. transmission control (TC) layer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission control (TC) layer

The layer within a half-session that synchronizes and controls the speed of
session-level data traffic and checks the sequence number of requests.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.59. transmission facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission facility

Synonym for telecommunication facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.60. transmission frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission frame

In data transmission, the data transported from one node to another in a
particular format that can be recognized by the receiving node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.61. transmission group (TG) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission group (TG)

 1. A group of links between adjacent subarea nodes, appearing as a single
    logical link for routing of messages.  A TG may consist of one or more SDLC
    links (parallel links) or of a single System/370 channel.

 2. In Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN), synonymous with link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.62. transmission header (TH) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission header (TH)

In Systems Network Architecture (SNA), the control information, optionally
followed by a basic information unit (BIU) or a BIU segment, that is created
and used by path control to route message units and to control their flow
within the network.  See also path information unit (PIU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.63. transmission medium ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission medium

The physical medium that conveys data between data stations; for example,
twisted pair wire, optical fiber, coaxial cable. (T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.64. transmission priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission priority

A rank assigned to a message unit that determines its precedence for being
selected by the path control component in each node along a route for
forwarding to the next node in the route.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.65. transmission service mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission service mode

A circuit-switched, packet-switched, nonswitched, or leased-circuit service
provided to the public by a communications common carrier or by a
telecommunication administration. Synonym for mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.66. transmission service mode profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmission service mode profile

A set of parameters that define a transmission service mode when connecting to
remote workstations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.67. transmit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transmit

To send information from one place for reception elsewhere. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.68. transport network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

transport network

The part of the Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network that includes the
data link control and path control layers.  Synonym for path control network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.69. trap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trap

An unprogrammed conditional jump to a specified address that is automatically
activated by hardware. A recording is made of the location from which the jump
occurred.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.70. TRS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRS

Topology and routing services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.71. truncation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

truncation

The process of discarding part of a result from an operation when it exceeds
memory or storage capacity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.72. TSO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TSO

Time Sharing Option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.73. twinaxial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

twinaxial

See twinaxial data link control (TDLC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.74. twinaxial cable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

twinaxial cable

A shielded cable with two conductors inside a larger conductor. The conductors
are insulated from the larger conductor and from one another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.75. twinaxial data link control (TDLC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

twinaxial data link control (TDLC)

A communications function that allows personal computers, attached to the
workstation controller by way of twinaxial cable, to use advanced
program-to-program communications (APPC) or Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
(APPN).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.76. twinaxial feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

twinaxial feature

See twinaxial data link control (TDLC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.77. type 2.0 node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 2.0 node

A node that attaches to a subarea network as a peripheral node and provides
full end-user services but no intermediate routing services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.78. type 2.1 (T2.1) end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 2.1 (T2.1) end node

A T2.1 node that provides full Systems Network Architecture (SNA) end-user
services, but no intermediate routing or network services to any other node.  A
T2.1 node is configured only as an end point in a network.  See also APPN end
node and LEN end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.79. type 2.1 (T2.1) intermediate routing network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 2.1 (T2.1) intermediate routing network

Synonym for APPN intermediate routing network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.80. type 2.1 (T2.1) network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 2.1 (T2.1) network

A collection of interconnected T2.1 network nodes and T2.1 end nodes. A T2.1
network can consist of nodes of just one type, specifically, all network nodes
or all end nodes; a pair of directly attached end nodes is the simplest case of
a T2.1 network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.81. type 2.1 (T2.1) network node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 2.1 (T2.1) network node

Synonym for APPN network node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.82. type 2.1 (T2.1) node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 2.1 (T2.1) node

A Systems Network Architecture (SNA) node that can be configured as an end
point or intermediate routing node in a T2.1 network or as a peripheral node
attached to a subarea network.  See also APPN end node, APPN network node, LEN
end node, and type 2.1 (T2.1) end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.83. type 4 node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 4 node

A subarea node that contains a physical unit control point (PUCP) rather than a
system services control point (SSCP) and that is controlled by one or more type
5 nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20.84. type 5 node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type 5 node

A subarea node containing a system services control point (SSCP) and having
hierarchical control of peripheral nodes and type 4 subarea nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. U (UA - utility) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o UA
o UAC
o UART
o UL
o unauthorized APPN end node
o unauthorized end node
o unavailable choice
o UNBIND
o unbind session (UNBIND)
o UNC
o uncommitted read
o Underwriters Laboratories (UL**)
o unformatted diskette
o unformatted program interface
o unformatted system services (USS)
o uniformly spaced font
o universal access authority
o universal access control (UAC)
o universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART)
o universal naming convention (UNC)
o unlock
o unnumbered acknowledgment (UA)
o unprotected field
o upload
o UPM
o upstream
o user
o user access list
o user ID
o user interface
o User Profile Management (UPM)
o user types
o Using help
o USS
o utility


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.1. UA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UA

Unnumbered acknowledgment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.2. UAC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UAC

Universal access control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.3. UART ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UART

Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.4. UL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UL**

Underwriters Laboratories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.5. unauthorized APPN end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unauthorized APPN end node

An Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) end node that is not authorized to
supply information about itself to its network node server.  The authorization
status of an end node is system-defined in its network node server.  If an end
node is unauthorized, the network node server must verify the correctness of
all information coming from that end node before allowing it to penetrate the
APPN network; in this way, the network node server protects the APPN network
from potential harm by unauthorized end nodes. Synonymous with unauthorized end
node. Contrast with authorized APPN end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.6. unauthorized end node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unauthorized end node

Synonym for unauthorized APPN end node.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.7. unavailable choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unavailable choice

A choice that the current state of the application does not allow users to
select because its selection would violate some condition of selection.
Contrast with available choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.8. UNBIND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNBIND

See unbind session (UNBIND).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.9. unbind session (UNBIND) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unbind session (UNBIND)

A request to deactivate a session between two logical units (LUs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.10. UNC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNC

Universal naming convention.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.11. uncommitted read ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

uncommitted read

The isolation level that provides maximum concurrency.  With uncommitted read,
a unit of work holds locks only on its uncommitted changes and the current row
of its cursors that are not for fetch only.  In addition, the unit of work can
view data that is uncommitted and locked by other transactions. See also
isolation level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.12. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

The Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. examines, tests, and determines the
suitability of materials and equipment to be used according to all National
Electric Safety Code and National Electric Code regulations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.13. unformatted diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unformatted diskette

A diskette that contains no data and no track or sector format information.
Contrast with formatted diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.14. unformatted program interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unformatted program interface

The part of 3270 emulation support that allows user application programs to use
the 3270 data stream in the form it is received from the host system.  Contrast
with formatted program interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.15. unformatted system services (USS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unformatted system services (USS)

A communications function that translates a character-coded command, such as
LOGON or LOGOFF, into a field-formatted command for processing by formatted
system services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.16. uniformly spaced font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

uniformly spaced font

A font with graphic characters contained in character cells of uniform size.
Synonymous with fixed-space font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.17. universal access authority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

universal access authority

A portion of the access control profile that contains the level of authority
given to all users that are not covered by any user or group entries in the
profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.18. universal access control (UAC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

universal access control (UAC)

A portion of the access control profile that contains the level of authority
given to all users not covered by user or group entries in the profile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.19. universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART)

An integrated circuit chip used in asynchronous communications hardware that
provides all the necessary logic to receive data in a serial-in parallel-out
fashion and to transmit data in a parallel-in serial-out fashion. See also
serial in, parallel out.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.20. universal naming convention (UNC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

universal naming convention (UNC)

A name used to identify the server and netname of a resource, taking the form:
\\servername\netname\path\filename, or \\servername\netname\devicename.  See
also netname.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.21. unlock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unlock

To release an object or system resource that was previously locked and return
it to general availability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.22. unnumbered acknowledgment (UA) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unnumbered acknowledgment (UA)

A Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) command used in establishing a link and
in answering receipt of SDLC frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.23. unprotected field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

unprotected field

A displayed field in which a user can add, modify, or delete data.  Contrast
with protected field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.24. upload ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

upload

To move data or programs from a workstation to a host.  Contrast with download.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.25. UPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UPM

User Profile Management.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.26. upstream ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

upstream

In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the direction opposite that of data flow.
Contrast with downstream.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.27. user ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

user

A person who accesses the services of a computing system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.28. user access list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

user access list

A list that defines individual users and their access authorities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.29. user ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

user ID

A unique name that identifies a user to the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.30. user interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

user interface

The hardware, software, or both that allows a user to interact with and perform
operations on a system, program, or device.  See interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.31. User Profile Management (UPM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

User Profile Management (UPM)

A function of OS/2 that provides user ID validation, and user and group
management facilities.  Communications Manager uses UPM. Each installation of
UPM is local to the particular workstation it is installed on and validates
user access to controlled data or programs that reside on that particular
workstation. UPM also provides the logon-logoff mechanism for identifying and
authenticating system users.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.32. user types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

user types

Users and network administrators. A user is any person who accesses the
services of a computing system. See also network administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.33. Using help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using help

A choice on the Help menu that gives a user information about how the help
function works.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.34. USS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

USS

Unformatted system services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21.35. utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

utility

The capability of a system, program, or device to perform the functions for
which it is designed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. V (V.24 - VTAM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o V.24
o V.35
o validation
o valid choice emphasis
o valid choice symbol
o value
o variable
o variable length string
o vary active
o vary inactive
o vary off
o vary on
o vector
o vector symbol
o vector symbol set
o vendor
o verb
o verification
o virtual call
o virtual call facility
o virtual circuit
o virtual device driver
o virtual DOS machine
o virtual machine (VM)
o Virtual Machine/Conversational Monitor System (VM/CMS)
o Virtual Machine/System Product (VM/SP)
o virtual memory
o virtual port
o virtual printer
o virtual routing node
o virtual serial port
o Virtual Storage Extended (VSE)
o Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM)
o VM
o VM/CMS
o VM/SP
o VSE
o VTAM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.1. V.24 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

V.24

In data communications, a recommendation of the CCITT that lists the
definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and
data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.2. V.35 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

V.35

In data communications, a recommendation of the CCITT that defines data
transmission at 48 Kb per second using 60-180 kHz group band circuits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3. validation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

validation

In X.25 communications, the process by which the receiving data terminal
equipment (DTE) accepts the packet size, packet window size, and throughput
class of the sending DTE, on condition that they are valid.  Contrast with
negotiation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.4. valid choice emphasis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

valid choice emphasis

A type of emphasis, such as a color change or the use of a valid choice symbol,
used to indicate which items in a list of choices are currently available for
selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.5. valid choice symbol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

valid choice symbol

A symbol to the left of a choice in a host panel that indicates the choices
available for selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.6. value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

value

 1. A specific occurrence of an attribute; for example, blue for the attribute
    color. (T)

 2. A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, parameter, or symbol. See
    also argument.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.7. variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

variable

An entity that can assume a value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.8. variable length string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

variable length string

A character or graphic string whose length is not fixed but variable within set
limits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.9. vary active ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vary active

Synonym for vary on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.10. vary inactive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vary inactive

Synonym for vary off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.11. vary off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vary off

To make a device, controller, or line unavailable for its normal, intended use.
Synonymous with vary inactive. Contrast with vary on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.12. vary on ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vary on

To make a device, controller, or line available for its normal, intended use.
Synonymous with vary active. Contrast with vary off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.13. vector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vector

The media access control (MAC) frame information field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.14. vector symbol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vector symbol

In graphics, a character or shape composed of a series of lines or curves.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.15. vector symbol set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vector symbol set

In graphics, a set of symbols originally created as a series of lines and
curves.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.16. vendor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

vendor

 1. A supplier that produces a program or product for IBM.

 2. A program produced by someone other than IBM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.17. verb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

verb

 1. An application programming interface (API) command.

 2. A reserved word that expresses an action to be taken by an application
    programming interface (API), a compiler, or an object program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.18. verification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

verification

The act of determining whether an operation has been accomplished correctly.
(T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.19. virtual call ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual call

Synonym for virtual call facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.20. virtual call facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual call facility

In data communication, a user facility in which a call setup procedure and a
call clearing procedure determine a period of communication between two pieces
of data terminal equipment (DTE) in which user data is transferred in the
network in the packet mode of operation.  All user data is delivered from the
network in the order it is received by the network.  It is the packet network
equivalent of a dialed line. Synonymous with virtual call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.21. virtual circuit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual circuit

 1. In packet switching, the facilities provided by a network that give the
    appearance to the user of an actual connection. (T) See permanent virtual
    circuit (PVC) and switched virtual circuit (SVC).

 2. A logical connection established between data terminal equipment (DTE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.22. virtual device driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual device driver

A form of device driver used by DOS programs running in a virtual DOS machine,
which is used to access devices that must be shared with other processes in the
OS/2 operating system, such as the screen or the mouse.  The virtual device
driver maps DOS device commands to the OS/2 2.0 or higher device driver.  See
also device driver and virtual DOS machine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.23. virtual DOS machine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual DOS machine

A session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the independent
execution of a DOS program.  See also screen group and virtual device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.24. virtual machine (VM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual machine (VM)

A functional simulation of a computer and its associated devices.  Each virtual
machine is controlled by a suitable operating system.  See also conversational
monitor system (CMS).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.25. Virtual Machine/Conversational Monitor System (VM/CMS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Virtual Machine/Conversational Monitor System (VM/CMS)

A time-sharing system control program (CP) that consists of a control program
that manages the resources of an IBM System/370 computing system in such a way
that multiple remote terminal users have a functional simulation of a computing
system at their disposal. It also contains the conversational monitor system
(CMS) that provides general time sharing, program development, and problem
solving facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.26. Virtual Machine/System Product (VM/SP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Virtual Machine/System Product (VM/SP)

An IBM licensed program that manages the resources of a single computer so that
multiple computing systems appear to exist.  Each virtual machine is the
functional equivalent of a real machine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.27. virtual memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual memory

The addressable space that is apparent to the user as the processor storage
space but does not have a fixed physical location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.28. virtual port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual port

A logical construct corresponding to a logical adapter for a switched network
port. A virtual port organizes outgoing switched logical links, specifying
incoming call acceptance criteria, dynamically building and relating logical
adapters with selected hardware adapter ports, and specifying adapter-related
DLC profiles for use with those logical adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.29. virtual printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual printer

A printer that can receive output from a workstation for printing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.30. virtual routing node ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual routing node

A representation of an end node's connectivity to a connection network defined
on a shared-access transport facility, such as a token ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.31. virtual serial port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

virtual serial port

See ACDI virtual serial port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.32. Virtual Storage Extended (VSE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Virtual Storage Extended (VSE*)

An operating system that is an extension of Disk Operating System/Virtual
Storage. VSE consists of:

o Licensed VSE/Advanced Functions support
o Any IBM-supplied and user-written programs that are required to meet the data
  processing needs of a user

VSE and the hardware it controls form a complete computing system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.33. Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM*)

A set of programs that control communications between nodes and application
programs running on a host (System/370) system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.34. VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VM

Virtual machine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.35. VM/CMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VM/CMS

Virtual Machine/Conversational Monitor System.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.36. VM/SP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VM/SP

Virtual Machine/System Product.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.37. VSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VSE

Virtual Storage Extended.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.38. VTAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VTAM*

Virtual Telecommunications Access Method.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. W (wait - WSC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o wait
o WAN
o warning message
o wide area network (WAN)
o wildcard character
o window
o window border
o window coordinates
o window count
o window style
o window title
o work area
o working directory
o working diskette
o working storage
o workplace
o workstation
o workstation address
o workstation controller (WSC)
o wrap
o write protection
o WSC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.1. wait ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

wait

A condition characterized by the suspension of normal program or keyboard
functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.2. WAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WAN

Wide area network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.3. warning message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

warning message

A message that provides information to users to alert them to a possible error
condition in the system.  Warning messages are also sent to warn users that the
action they are attempting can cause an undesirable condition or consequence.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.4. wide area network (WAN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

wide area network (WAN)

A network that provides data communication capability in geographic areas
larger than those serviced by local area networks (LANs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.5. wildcard character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

wildcard character

The characters that allow substitution in strings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.6. window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

window

 1. An area with visible boundaries that presents a view of an object with
    which a user conducts a dialog with a computer system.

 2. In data communication, the number of data packets a DTE or DCE can send
    across a logical channel before waiting for authorization to send another
    data packet.  The window is the main mechanism of pacing, or flow control,
    of packets and frames. See also screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.7. window border ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

window border

A visual indication of the boundaries of a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.8. window coordinates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

window coordinates

In Presentation Interface, the means by which a window position or size is
defined; measured in device units or pixels.  See also pixel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.9. window count ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

window count

In communications, the maximum number of information frames that can be sent or
received by the link station before acknowledgment is sent or received.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.10. window style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

window style

In Communications Manager, the properties of the emulation session window, such
as font and text size, that can be changed by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.11. window title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

window title

The area on a title bar that contains a short description of the contents of
the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.12. work area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

work area

 1. An area in which terminal devices (such as displays, keyboards, and
    printers) are located.

 2. An area reserved for temporary storage of data.

 3. A container used to group windows and objects to perform a task. Users can
    modify sample work areas to suit their own needs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.13. working directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

working directory

The directory in which an application program is found. The working directory
becomes the current directory when the application is started unless otherwise
set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.14. working diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

working diskette

A computer fixed disk or diskette to which files are copied from an original
diskette for use in everyday operation. Synonymous with operational diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.15. working storage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

working storage

Synonym for temporary storage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.16. workplace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

workplace

A container that fits the entire screen and holds all of the objects that make
up the user interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.17. workstation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

workstation

A terminal or personal computer, usually one that is connected to a mainframe
or within a network, at which a user can run applications. See also system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.18. workstation address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

workstation address

 1. A number used in a configuration file to identify a workstation attached to
    a computer port.

 2. The address the switches on a workstation are set to, or the internal
    address assumed by the system, if no address is specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.19. workstation controller (WSC) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

workstation controller (WSC)

An input/output (I/O) controller card in the card enclosure that provides the
direct connection of local workstations to the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.20. wrap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

wrap

A condition that occurs when a file or buffer is full and new data overlays
existing data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.21. write protection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

write protection

The restriction of writing into a file or memory area by a user or program not
authorized to do so. See also read-only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.22. WSC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WSC

Workstation controller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. X (XID - X.32) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o XID
o xmodem
o XID frame
o XOFF
o XON
o XVRB
o X.21
o X.21 bis
o X.21 feature
o X.25
o X.25 feature
o X.25 network
o X.25 verb
o X.25 verb request control block (XVRB)
o X.32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.1. XID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XID

 1. Exchange station ID.

 2. Exchange identification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.2. xmodem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

xmodem

An asynchronous communications data transfer protocol where data is transferred
in 128-byte blocks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.3. XID frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XID frame

Exchange station ID frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.4. XOFF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XOFF

In communications, a flow control value used to signal the remote transmitter
to suspend data transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.5. XON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XON

In communications, a flow control value used to signal the remote transmitter
to start or resume data transmission.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.6. XVRB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XVRB

X.25 verb request control block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.7. X.21 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.21

In data communications, a recommendation of the CCITT that defines the
interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and public data networks for
digital-leased and circuit-switched synchronous services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.8. X.21 bis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.21 bis

In data communications, a recommendation of the CCITT that defines the use on
public data networks of data terminal equipment (DTE) that is designed for
interfacing to synchronous V-series modems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.9. X.21 feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.21 feature

A feature that allows a system to be connected to an X.21 network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.10. X.25 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.25

In data communications, a recommendation of the CCITT that defines the
interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and packet switching networks.
Recommendations X.25 (Geneva 1980) and X.25 (Malaga-Torremolinos 1984) are
supported by Communications Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.11. X.25 feature ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.25 feature

A feature that allows a system to be connected to an X.25 network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.12. X.25 network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.25 network

A service providing packet-switched data transmission that conforms to
Recommendation X.25 adopted by the CCITT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.13. X.25 verb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.25 verb

A dynamic link library (DLL) routine provided by the X.25 application
programming interface (API) to manage, control, or use an X.25 network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.14. X.25 verb request control block (XVRB) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.25 verb request control block (XVRB)

A data structure passed to the X.25 support to request the execution of an X.25
API verb.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.15. X.32 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

X.32

In data communications, a recommendation of the CCITT that defines the
interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and packet-switching networks
through a public switched network, such as a public telephone network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Z (z-order) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o z-order


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25.1. z-order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

z-order

In Presentation Interface, the order sibling windows are presented in. The
topmost sibling window obscures any portion of the siblings that it overlaps;
the same effect occurs down through the order of lower sibling windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Numeric (3174 Peer Communication Network - 5250 emulation) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o 3174 Peer Communications Network
o 3270 emulation
o 5250 emulation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.1. 3174 Peer Communications Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

3174 Peer Communications Network

A function that provides peer-to-peer communication for programmable
workstations connected to an IBM 3174 Control Unit through IBM 3270
communication adapters using coaxial cable or telephone twisted-pair wire.
This function is achieved through:

o 3174 Peer Communications Network network device interface specification
  (NDIS) media access control (MAC) driver

o 3174 Peer Communications Network program running on the 3174 Control Unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.2. 3270 emulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

3270 emulation

A feature of Communications Manager that allows a workstation to perform like a
3270 terminal and use the functions of S/370 hosts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26.3. 5250 emulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5250 emulation

A feature of Communications Manager that allows a workstation to perform like a
5250 display station and use the functions of an IBM AS/400, IBM System/36, or
IBM System/38 system.





ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> height=100%.(A) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Terms denoted with (A) are taken from the American National Directory for
Information Systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> height=100%.(I) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Terms denoted with (I) are taken from the Information Technology Vocabulary,
developed by Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee 1, of the International
Organization for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical
Commission (ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1) published parts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> height=100%.(T) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Terms denoted with (T) are taken from the Information Technology Vocabulary,
developed by Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee 1, of the International
Organization for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical
Commission (ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1) drafts and working papers. The symbol (T)
indicates that final agreement has not yet been reached among the participating
National Bodies of SC1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of IBM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of Intel